WO2010051497A1 - Filamin a binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic - Google Patents

Filamin a binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2010051497A1
WO2010051497A1 PCT/US2009/062860 US2009062860W WO2010051497A1 WO 2010051497 A1 WO2010051497 A1 WO 2010051497A1 US 2009062860 W US2009062860 W US 2009062860W WO 2010051497 A1 WO2010051497 A1 WO 2010051497A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
mmol
pharmaceutically acceptable
acceptable salt
salt according
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2009/062860
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Lindsay Burns Barbier
Hoau-Yan Wang
Nan-Horng Lin
Andrei Blasko
Original Assignee
Pain Therapeutics, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US12/263,257 external-priority patent/US8722851B2/en
Priority claimed from US12/435,284 external-priority patent/US20100279996A1/en
Application filed by Pain Therapeutics, Inc. filed Critical Pain Therapeutics, Inc.
Priority to AU2009308702A priority Critical patent/AU2009308702B2/en
Priority to CA2779261A priority patent/CA2779261C/en
Priority to ES09824197.9T priority patent/ES2610231T3/en
Priority to EP09824197.9A priority patent/EP2488177B1/en
Priority claimed from US12/610,091 external-priority patent/US8653068B2/en
Publication of WO2010051497A1 publication Critical patent/WO2010051497A1/en
Priority to IL219464A priority patent/IL219464A/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/445—Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine
    • A61K31/4523—Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine containing further heterocyclic ring systems
    • A61K31/454—Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine containing further heterocyclic ring systems containing a five-membered ring with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. pimozide, domperidone
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/10—Spiro-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D498/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D498/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D498/10—Spiro-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D513/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for in groups C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D499/00 - C07D507/00
    • C07D513/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for in groups C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D499/00 - C07D507/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D513/10—Spiro-condensed systems

Definitions

  • This invention contemplates a composition and related method for providing long-lasting analgesia and reducing inflammation. More particularly, a compound, composition and method are described that utilize a small molecule to bind filamin A, to reduce inflammation and to preserve Gi/o signaling by the mu opioid receptor, known to interact with filamin A. Preferably, the compound reduces inflammation, preserves mu opioid receptor - Gi/o signaling and also functions as a mu opioid receptor agonist. Most preferably, the compound binds filamin A with picomolar or sub-picomolar affinity .
  • filamins are large cytoplasmic proteins increasingly found to regulate cell signaling by interacting with over 30 different receptors and signaling molecules (Feng et al . , 2004 Nat Cell Biol 6:1034-1038; Stossel et al . , 2001 Nature 2:138-145), including the mu opioid receptor (MOR) (Onoprishvili et al, 2003 MoI Pharmacol 64:1092-1100) .
  • Filamins are dimerized through the last carboxy-terminal repeat near the transmembrane regions, allowing an intracellular V-shaped structure that is critical for function.
  • FLNA filamin A
  • B and C are three mammalian isoforms: filamin A (FLNA), B and C.
  • FLNA controls cell motility by controlling the cycle of actin polymerization and depolymerization, allowing cells to move and to migrate.
  • actin depolymerization is linked to the inflammatory response, binding to FLNA suppresses inflammation by slowing actin polymerization and cell motility.
  • a second function of binding to FLNA is a beneficial regulation of opioid receptor signaling; i.e., a maintenance of coupling to Gi and Go proteins.
  • MOR preferentially couples to pertussis toxin-sensitive G proteins, Gi/o (inhibitory/other), and inhibits the adenylyl cyclase/cAMP pathway (Laugwitz et al . , 1993 Neuron 10:233-242; Connor et al., 1999 Clin Exp Pharmacol Physiol 26:493-499) .
  • Analgesia results from these MOR-linked inhibitory G protein (Gi/o) signaling cascades and related ion channel interactions that suppress cellular activities by hyperpolarization .
  • Adaptive responses of opioid receptors contribute to the development of analgesic tolerance and physical dependence, and possibly also to components of opioid addiction.
  • a critical adaptive response of the MOR is a switch in G protein coupling from its native Gi/o proteins to stimulatory Gs proteins, resulting in opposite effects on the cell upon activation as well as analgesic tolerance and physical dependence (Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-261) .
  • Prevention of this G protein coupling switch by agents that bind filamin A Wang et al, 2008 PLoS One 3:el554
  • a scaffolding protein known to interact with MOR can alleviate unwanted adaptive responses to continued opioid administration.
  • a chronic opioid-induced switch to Gs coupling by MOR can cause excitatory signaling, by activation of adenylyl cyclase, in place of the usual inhibitory signaling or inhibition of adenylyl cyclase (Crain et al . , 1992 Brain Res 575:13-24; Crain et al . , 2000 Pain 84:121-131; Gintzler et al . , 2001 MoI Neurobiol 21:21-33; Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-261) .
  • This switch in G protein coupling from Gi/o to Gs Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-261; Chakrabarti et al .
  • the chronic opioid-induced MOR - G protein coupling switch is accompanied by stimulation of adenylyl cyclase II and IV by MOR-associated G ⁇ dimers (Chakrabarti et al . , 1998 MoI Pharmacol 54:655-662; Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-
  • MORs are normally inhibitory G protein-coupled receptors that couple to Gi or Go proteins to inhibit adenylyl cyclase and decrease production of the second messenger cAMP, as well as to suppress cellular activities via ion channel- mediated hyperpolarization .
  • Opioid analgesic tolerance and dependence are also associated with that switch in G protein coupling by MOR from Gi/o to Gs (Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-261) . This switch results in activation of adenylyl cyclase that provides essentially opposite, stimulatory, effects on the cell.
  • Controlling this switch in G protein coupling by MOR is the scaffolding protein FLNA, and compounds that bind a particular segment of FLNA with high affinity, like naloxone (NLX) and naltrexone (NTX), can prevent this switch (Wang et al, 2008 PLoS One 3:el554) and the associated analgesic tolerance and dependence (Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-261) .
  • This switch in G protein coupling also occurs acutely, though transiently, and is potentially linked to the acute rewarding or addictive effects of opioid drugs, through CREB activation as a result of increased cAMP accumulation (Wang et al . , 2009 PLoS ONE 4(l) :e4282) .
  • Ultra-low-dose NLX or NTX have been shown to enhance opioid analgesia, minimize opioid tolerance and dependence (Crain et al . , 1995 Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 92:10540-10544; Powell et al . 2002. JPET 300:588-596), as well as to attenuate the addictive properties of opioids (Leri et al . , 2005 Pharmacol Biochem Behav 82:252-262; Olmstead et al . , 2005 Psychopharmacology 181:576-581) .
  • An ultra-low dose of opioid antagonist was an amount initially based on in vitro studies of nociceptive dorsal root ganglion neurons and on in vivo mouse studies.
  • ultra-low-dose opioid antagonists enhance analgesia and alleviate tolerance/dependence by blocking the excitatory signaling opioid receptors that underlie opioid tolerance and hyperalgesia (Crain et al . , 2000 Pain 84:121-131) .
  • ultra-low-dose defined herein, naloxone or naltrexone
  • CREB is a transcription factor implicated in addiction as well as learning and memory and several other experience- dependent, adaptive (or maladaptive) behaviors (Carlezon et al . , 2005 Trends Neurosci 28:436-445) .
  • CREB is inhibited by acute opioid treatment, an effect that is completely attenuated by chronic opioid treatment, and activated during opioid withdrawal (Guitart et al . , 1992 J Neurochem 58:1168- 1171) .
  • CREB activation has been viewed as a homeostatic adaptation, attenuating the acute rewarding effects of drugs (Nestler, 2001 Am J Addict 10:201-217; Nestler, 2004 Neuropharmacology 47:24-32) .
  • This view is supported by nucleus accumbens overexpression of CREB or a dominant- negative mutant respectively reducing or increasing the rewarding effects of opioids in the conditioned place preference test (Barot et al . , 2002 Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 99:11435-11440) .
  • the receptor With chronic opioid exposure, the receptor can lose the ability to recover and continue to couple to Gs, activating the adenylyl cyclase/cAMP pathway, upregulating protein kinase A, and phosphorylating CREB as one downstream effector example.
  • the persistently elevated phosphorylated CREB can then shape the expression of responsive genes including those closely related to drug addiction and tolerance.
  • the equivalent blockade of Gs coupling and pS 133 CREB by the pentapeptide binding site of naloxone (NLX) and naltrexone (NTX) on FLNA further elucidates the mechanism of action of ultra-low-dose NLX and NTX in their varied effects.
  • the non-opioid cellular target of ultra-low-dose NLX or NTX, FLNA provides potential for developing either a therapeutic combination of which one component is not required to be ultra-low-dose, or a single-entity novel analgesic .
  • the present invention identifies a compound that binds to filamin A (FLNA; the high-affinity binding site of naloxone [NLX] and naltrexone [NTX] ) , to reduce cell motility and inflammation as well as to prevent the Gi/o-to-Gs coupling switch of MOR and is similar to or more active than DAMGO in activating MOR.
  • FLNA the high-affinity binding site of naloxone [NLX] and naltrexone [NTX]
  • the present invention contemplates an analgesic compound, a composition containing that compound and a method of reducing pain in a host mammal in need thereof by administering a composition containing such a compound.
  • a compound that corresponds in structure to Formula A is contemplated
  • P and W is NR 20 , ii) one of G, P and W must be NR 20 , and iii) P is NR 2 when other than NR 20 .
  • X is SO 2 , C(O), CH 2 , CD 2 , OC(O), NHC(NH) or NHC(O), preferably
  • Q is CHR 9 or C(O) and Z is CHR 10 or C(O), and preferably, only one of Q and Z is C(O) .
  • D and F are the same or different and are CH or CD
  • E and K are the same or different and are
  • Circle A is an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system that contains one ring or two fused rings, and preferably contains a single ring.
  • R ⁇ represents up to three substituents, Rl a , R ⁇ , and R1 C , that themselves can be the same or different, wherein each of those three groups, Rl a ⁇ c , is separately selected from the group consisting of H, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxy, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxycarbonyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C ⁇ -C 7 hydrocarboyl, hydroxy-, trifluoromethyl- (-CF3) or halogen-substituted C]_-C 7 hydrocarboyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbylsulfonyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxysulfonyl, halogen, nitro, phenyl, cyano, carboxyl, C]_-C 7 hydrocarbyl carboxylate
  • R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each H, which is preferred, or two of R 8 , R ⁇ , and R-L ⁇ are H and one is a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl group that is unsubstituted or is substituted with up to three atoms that are the same or different and are oxygen or nitrogen atoms.
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 13 and R 14 are all H, or R 11 and R 13 are H and R 12 and R 14 are H or D, or one of the pair RH and R-*- 2 or the pair R- ⁇ 3 and R-*- 4 together with the depicted ring form a saturated or unsaturated 6-membered ring, and the other pair are each H or they are H and D as recited in this paragraph (herein) .
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of Formula A and all of the remaining formulas disclosed herein is contemplated.
  • a compound of Formula A corresponds in structure to Formula B.
  • G and W are selected from the group consisting of NR 20 , NR 7 , CH2, S and 0, where R 2 and
  • W is NR 20 and that one of G and W must be NR 20 .
  • X is SO2, C(O), CH 2 , CD 2 , OC(O), NHC(NH) or NHC(O); Q is
  • CHR 9 or C(O); and Z is CHR 10 or C(O) .
  • D and F are the same or different and are CH or CD and E and K are the same or different and are CH 2 , CHD or CD 2 .
  • Circle A is an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system that contains one ring or two fused rings, preferably one ring; and group R ⁇ is H or represents up to three substituents, R ⁇ a , R ⁇ -b, anc ⁇ R1°, that themselves can be the same or different, in which each of those three groups, R ⁇ - a ⁇ c , is separately selected from the group consisting of H, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxy, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxycarbonyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-C7 hydrocarboyl (acyl), hydroxy-
  • Groups R ⁇ , R9 r and R-L ⁇ are each H, which is preferred, or two of R°, R ⁇ , and R- ⁇ O are H and one is a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl group that is unsubstituted or is substituted with up to three atoms that are the same or different and are oxygen or nitrogen atoms.
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 13 and R 14 are all H, or RH and R-*- 3 are H and R-*- 2 and R-*- 4 are H or D, or one of the pair R 11 and R 12 or the pair R 13 and R 14 together with the depicted ring form a saturated or unsaturated 6-membered ring, and the other pair are each H or they are H and D as recited in this paragraph (herein) .
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of Formula B is also contemplated.
  • a compound of Formula A corresponds in structure to Formula C.
  • X is SO2, C(O), CH 2 , CD 2 , OC(O), NHC(NH) or NHC(O);
  • Q is CHR 9 or C(O); and
  • Z is CHR 10 or C(O), and preferably, only one of Q and Z is C(O) .
  • Circle A is an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system that contains a single ring or two fused rings; and group R ⁇ is H or represents up to three substituents, Rl a , R ⁇ , and R1°, that themselves can be the same or different, in which each of the three groups, R ⁇ - a ⁇ c , is separately selected from the group consisting of H, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxy, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxycarbonyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-C7 hydrocarboyl, hydroxy-, trifluoromethyl- (-CF3) or halogen-substituted C1-C7 hydrocarboyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbylsulfonyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxysulfonyl, halogen, nitro, phenyl, cyano, carboxyl, C1-C7 hydrocarbyl carboxylate
  • Ar is a single-ringed aryl or heteroaryl group
  • NR ⁇ R6 wherein R ⁇ and R ⁇ are the same or different and are H, C1-C4 hydrocarbyl, C1-C4 acyl, C]_-C4 hydrocarbylsulfonyl, or R ⁇ and R ⁇ together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7- membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur.
  • Groups R ⁇ , R ⁇ , and R10 are each H, or two of R ⁇ , R ⁇ , and R- ⁇ O are H and one is a is a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl group that is unsubstituted or is substituted with up to three atoms that are the same or different and are oxygen or nitrogen atoms; and groups R , R ⁇ - 2 , R13 anc ⁇ R14 are all H, or R 11 and R 13 are H and R 12 and R 14 are H or D, or one of the pair R ⁇ and R-*- 2 or the pair R13 and R!4 together with the depicted ring form a saturated or unsaturated 6-membered ring, and the other pair are each H or they are H and D as recited herein (in this subparagraph) .
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of Formula C is also contemplated.
  • a preferred compound of Formulas A and B has the structure of Formula I
  • R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH 2 ,
  • a compound of Formulas A and B has the structure of Formula II where X, W, circle A, R 1 , R 2 and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH 2 ,
  • a compound of Formulas A and B has the structure of Formula III
  • a compound of Formulas A and C has the structure of Formula IV where X, W, Z, Q, n, m, circle A, R 1 , R 2 ,
  • R8 and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH 2 , CHD or CD 2 .
  • compound of Formulas A and C has the structure of Formula V
  • compound of Formulas A and C has the structure of Formula VI
  • X, W, Z, Q, n, m, circle A, R ⁇ , R ⁇ and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH 2 , CHD or CD 2 .
  • X is C(O), CH 2 , CD 2 , or SO 2 , and separately preferred that W is
  • circle A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl ( 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, 1, 2, 4-triazinyl and 1 , 2 , 3-triazinyl ) , furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, naphthyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, quinazolyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridin
  • a contemplated compound can contain deuterated carbon atoms on either side of the "X" substituent.
  • Deuterated compounds can be useful in studying the mechanism of drug interactions with living organisms for the elucidation of metabolic and biosynthetic pathways. Deuteration can also extend the half-life of a contemplated compound in vivo because a C-D bond is stronger than a C-H bond thereby requiring more energy input for bond cleavage. See, Blake et al . , 1975 J. Pharm. Sci. 64 (3) : 367-391 ; and Nelson et al . , 2003 Drug Metab. Dispos . 31 (12) : 1481-1498, and the citations therein. Contemplated deuterated compounds are prepared using well-known reactions.
  • a pharmaceutical composition is also contemplated. That composition comprises an above compound of Formulas A, B, C, and I—VI or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt dissolved or dispersed in a physiologically tolerable carrier. The compound is present in an effective analgesic amount.
  • the composition is preferably in solid form as in a tablet of capsule.
  • a method of reducing one or both of pain and inflammation in a host mammal in need thereof comprises administering to that host mammal a pharmaceutical composition as disclosed above.
  • the host mammal for such a method is selected from the group consisting of a primate, a laboratory rodent, a companion animal, and a food animal.
  • a composition can be administered a plurality of times over a period of days, as well as administered a plurality of times in one day. That administration can be perorally or parenterally .
  • the present invention has several benefits and advantages.
  • One benefit is anti-inflammatory action combined with analgesia by a compound with a novel mechanism of action for both that does not have a narcotic structure.
  • An advantage of the invention is that analgesia can be provided by administration of a contemplated composition either perorally or parenterally .
  • a further benefit of the invention is that as indicated by the initial data, a contemplated compound provides the analgesic effects characteristic of opioid drugs but does not cause analgesic tolerance or dependence.
  • Another advantage of the invention as also indicated by the initial data is that a contemplated compound provides the analgesic effects characteristic of opioid drugs and does not have the addictive potential of opioid drugs.
  • MOR means ⁇ opioid receptor "FLNA” means filamin A "NLX” means naloxone "NTX” means naltrexone "Gi/o” means G protein inhibitory/other subtype, inhibits adenylyl cyclase
  • Gs means G protein stimulatory subtype, stimulates adenylyl cyclase
  • G ⁇ means G protein beta gamma subunit
  • cAMP means cyclic adenosine monophosphate
  • CREB means cAMP Response Element Binding protein
  • Immunoglobulin G means Immunoglobulin G
  • an element means one element or more than one element.
  • hydrocarbyl is a short hand term for a non-aromatic group that includes straight and branched chain aliphatic as well as alicyclic groups or radicals that contain only carbon and hydrogen.
  • alicyclic groups are cyclic aliphatic groups, such substituents are deemed hereinafter to be subsumed within the aliphatic groups.
  • alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups are contemplated, whereas aromatic hydrocarbons such as phenyl and naphthyl groups, which strictly speaking are also hydrocarbyl groups, are referred to herein as aryl groups, substituents, moieties or radicals, as discussed hereinafter.
  • An aralkyl substituent group such as benzyl is deemed an aromatic group as being an aromatic ring bonded to an X group, where X is CH2.
  • a substituent group containing both an aliphatic ring and an aromatic ring portion such as tetralin (tetrahydronaphthalene) that is linked directly through the aliphatic portion to the depicted ring containing the W group is deemed a non-aromatic, hydrocarbyl group.
  • a similar group bonded directly via the aromatic portion is deemed to be a substituted aromatic group.
  • a specific aliphatic hydrocarbyl substituent group is intended, that group is recited; i.e., C1-C4 alkyl, methyl or dodecenyl .
  • Exemplary hydrocarbyl groups contain a chain of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, and preferably 1 to about 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms of an alkyl group.
  • hydrocarbyl group is an alkyl group.
  • a generalized, but more preferred substituent can be recited by replacing the descriptor "hydrocarbyl” with “alkyl” in any of the substituent groups enumerated herein.
  • alkyl radicals examples include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, iso-amyl, hexyl, octyl, decyl, dodecyl and the like.
  • suitable alkenyl radicals include ethenyl (vinyl), 2-propenyl, 3-propenyl, 1, 4-pentadienyl, 1, 4-butadienyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, 3-butenyl, decenyl and the like.
  • alkynyl radicals examples include ethynyl, 2-propynyl, 3-propynyl, decynyl, 1-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 3-butynyl, and the like.
  • hydrocarbyl ether is referred to as a "hydrocarbyloxy” group rather than a "hydrocarboxy” group as may possibly be more proper when following the usual rules of chemical nomenclature.
  • Illustrative hydrocarbyloxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, and cyclohexenyloxy groups.
  • hydrocarbyl group containing a -C(O)- functionality is referred to as a hydrocarboyl (acyl) and that containing a -C(O)O- is a hydrocarboyloxy group inasmuch as there is no ambiguity.
  • exemplary hydrocarboyl and hydrocarboyloxy groups include acyl and acyloxy groups, respectively, such as acetyl and acetoxy, acryloyl and acryloyloxy.
  • Carboxyl-related linking groups between the central spiro ring system and an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system, circle A include several types of ester and amide bonds. Illustrative of such bonds are sulfonamide, sulfonate and thiosulfonate esters that can be formed between a S ⁇ 2-containing group and an amine, oxygen or sulfur atom, respectively. Amide, ester and thioester links can be formed between an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring containing a C(O) group and a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom, respectively.
  • a guanidino linker can be formed between an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring containing a NHC(NH) group and a nitrogen
  • a urethane, carbonate or thiocarbonate can be formed between an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring containing a OC(O) group and a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, respectively.
  • a compound containing a urea linker, urethane linker or isothiourea linker [NHC(O)S] can be formed between an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring containing a NHC(O) group and a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, respectively.
  • a “carboxyl” substituent is a -C(O)OH group.
  • a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl carboxylate is a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl ester of a carboxyl group.
  • a carboxamide is a -C(O)NR3R4 substituent, where the R groups are defined elsewhere.
  • a sulfonamide is a -S(O)2NR3R4 substituent, where the R groups are defined hereinafter.
  • Illustrative R ⁇ and R ⁇ groups that together with the depicted nitrogen of a carboxamide form a 5-7-membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, include morpholinyl, piperazinyl, oxathiazolyl, 1,2,3- triazolyl, 1, 2, 4-triazolyl, pyrazolyl, 1,2,4- oxadiazinyl and azepinyl groups.
  • aryl alone or in combination, means a phenyl, naphthyl or other radical as recited hereinafter that optionally carries one or more substituents selected from hydrocarbyl, hydrocarbyloxy, halogen, hydroxy, amino, nitro and the like, such as phenyl, p-tolyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 4- (tert-butoxy) phenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl, and the like.
  • arylhydrocarbyl means a hydrocarbyl radical as defined above in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by an aryl radical as defined above, such as benzyl, 2-phenylethyl and the like.
  • arylhydrocarbyloxycarbonyl alone or in combination, means a radical of the formula - C (0) -O-arylhydrocarbyl in which the term “arylhydrocarbyl” has the significance given above.
  • An example of an arylhydrocarbyloxycarbonyl radical is benzyloxycarbonyl .
  • aryloxy means a radical of the formula aryl-0- in which the term aryl has the significance given above.
  • aromatic ring in combinations such as substituted-aromatic ring sulfonamide, substituted-aromatic ring sulfinamide or substituted-aromatic ring sulfenamide means aryl or heteroaryl as defined above.
  • binds refers to the adherence of molecules to one another, such as, but not limited to, peptides or small molecules such as the compounds disclosed herein, and opioid antagonists, such as naloxone or naltrexone.
  • selective binds refers to binding as a distinct activity. Examples of such distinct activities include the independent binding to FLNA or a FLNA peptide, and the binding of a compound discussed above to a MOR.
  • FLNA-binding compound refers to a compound that binds to the scaffolding protein filamin A, or more preferably to a polypeptide comprising residues -Val-Ala-Lys-Gly- Leu- (SEQ ID N0:l) of the FLNA sequence that correspond to amino acid residue positions 2561-2565 of the FLNA protein sequence as noted in the sequence provided at the web address: UniProtKB/Swiss-Prot entry P21333, FLNA-HUMAN, Filamin-A protein sequence.
  • a FLNA-binding compound can inhibit the MOR-Gs coupling caused by agonist stimulation of the ⁇ opioid receptor via interactions with filamin A, preferably in the 24 th repeat region. When coadministered with an opioid agonist, a FLNA-binding compound can enhance the analgesic effects and improve the treatment of pain.
  • FLNA-binding compound refers to a substance to be screened as a potential FLNA-binding compound.
  • a FLNA-binding compound is also an opioid agonist.
  • a FLNA-binding compound can function in a combinatory manner similar to the combination of an opioid agonist and ultra- low-dose antagonist, wherein both FLNA and MOR are targeted by a single entity.
  • opioid receptor refers to a G protein coupled receptor, located in the central nervous system that interacts with opioids. More specifically, the ⁇ opioid receptor is activated by morphine causing analgesia, sedation, nausea, and many other side effects known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • opioid agonist refers to a substance that upon binding to an opioid receptor can stimulate the receptor, induce G protein coupling and trigger a physiological response. More specifically, an opioid agonist is a morphine-like substance that interacts with MOR to produce analgesia .
  • opioid antagonist refers to a substance that upon binding to an opioid receptor inhibits the function of an opioid agonist by interfering with the binding of the opioid agonist to the receptor.
  • an “analgesia effective amount” refers to an amount sufficient to provide analgesia or pain reduction to a recipient host.
  • an "inflammation effective amount” refers to an amount sufficient to provide reduction of inflammation to a recipient host.
  • ultra-low-dose or “ultra-low amount” refers to an amount of compound that when given in combination with an opioid agonist is sufficient to enhance the analgesic potency of the opioid agonist. More specifically, the ultra-low-dose of an opioid antagonist is admixed with an opioid agonist in an amount about 1000- to about 10, 000, 000-fold less, and preferably about 10,000- to about 1, 000, 000-fold less than the amount of opioid agonist.
  • an "FLNA-binding effective amount” refers to an amount sufficient to perform the functions described herein, such as reduction or prevention of inflammation, inhibition of MOR-Gs coupling, prevention of the cAMP desensitization measure, inhibition of CREB S 133 phosphorylation and inhibition of any other cellular indices of opioid tolerance and dependence, which functions can also be ascribed to ultra-low-doses of certain opioid antagonists such as naloxone or naltrexone.
  • an FLNA-binding effective amount can be an ultra-low amount or an amount higher than an ultra-low-dose as the polypeptide or FLNA-binding compound will not antagonize the opioid receptor and compete with the agonist, as occurs with known opioid antagonists such as naloxone or naltrexone in amounts greater than ultra-low-doses. More preferably, when a polypeptide or VAKGL-binding compound of the present invention both interacts with FLNA and is an agonist of the mu opioid receptor, an FLNA-binding effective amount is an amount higher than an ultra-low-dose and is a sufficient amount to activate the mu opioid receptor.
  • determining inhibition of the interaction of MOR with a Gs protein refers to monitoring the cellular index of opioid tolerance and dependence caused by chronic or high-dose administration of opioid agonists to mammalian cells. More specifically, the mu opioid receptor - Gs coupling response can be identified by measuring the presence of the Gas (stimulatory) subunit, the interaction of MOR with the G protein complexes and formation of Gs-MOR coupling, the interaction of the G ⁇ protein with adenylyl cyclase types II and IV, loss of inhibition or outright enhancement of cAMP accumulation, and the activation of CREB via phosphorylation of S 133 .
  • naloxone/naltrexone positive control refers to a positive control method comprising steps discussed in a method embodiment, wherein the candidate FLNA-binding compound is a known opioid antagonist administered in an ultra-low amount, preferably naloxone or naltrexone.
  • FLNA-binding compound negative control refers to a negative control method comprising steps discussed in a method embodiment, wherein the candidate FLNA-binding compound is absent and the method is carried out in the presence of only opioid agonist.
  • pharmaceutically active is not meant to imply any pharmacological activity. The term refers to chemical features and their distribution in three-dimensional space that constitutes and epitomizes the preferred requirements for molecular interaction with a receptor (U.S. Patent No. 6, 034, 066) .
  • the present invention contemplates a compound that binds to FLNA and also stimulates MOR, a composition containing that compound and method of its use to provide one or both of pain relief and reduction of inflammation.
  • a contemplated compound can suppress inflammation and inhibit MOR-Gs coupling through interactions with FLNA and/or MOR.
  • a contemplated compound inhibits or prevents the morphine-induced Gs protein coupling by MOR. That prevention of MOR-Gs coupling is believed to occur by preserving a particular interaction of filamin A and MOR. Downstream effects of preventing the MOR-Gs coupling include inhibition of cAMP accumulation and of cAMP Response Element Binding protein (CREB) activation in a manner resembling the activity of ultra-low-dose opioid antagonists naloxone and naltrexone .
  • CREB cAMP Response Element Binding protein
  • a FLNA-binding compound prevents or inhibits the MOR- Gs coupling while itself activating MOR.
  • organotypic striatal slice cultures demonstrate that after 7 days of twice daily 1-hour exposures to oxycodone, MOR in striatum switch from Go to Gs coupling (compare vehicle to oxycodone conditions) .
  • a compound contemplated herein does not cause a switch to Gs coupling despite its ability to stimulate MOR as previously assessed by GTP ⁇ S binding that is blocked by beta-funaltrexamine, a specific MOR antagonist.
  • a compound contemplated by the present invention binds to an above-defined FLNA polypeptide as well as stimulates MOR.
  • a contemplated compound corresponds in structure to Formula A
  • X is SO2, C(O), CH 2 , CD 2 , OC(O), NHC(NH) or NHC(O), preferably SO 2 , C(O) or CH 2 , and most preferably SO 2 # Q is CHR 9 or C(O) and Z is CHR 10 or C(O), and preferably, only one of Q and Z is C(O) .
  • Each of m and n is zero or one and the sum of m+n is 1 or 2, preferably 1.
  • Circle A is an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system that preferably contains a single ring, but can also contain two fused rings.
  • R-L is H or represents up to three substituents, R ⁇ a , R ⁇ -b, anc ⁇ R1°, that themselves can be the same or different, wherein each of those three groups, R ⁇ - a ⁇ c , is separately selected from the group consisting of H, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxy, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxycarbonyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C ⁇ -C 7 hydrocarboyl, hydroxy-, trifluoromethyl- (-CF3) or halogen-substituted C]_-C 7 hydrocarboyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbylsulfonyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxysulfonyl, halogen, nitro, phenyl, cyano, carboxyl
  • R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each H, which is preferred, or two of R 8 , R ⁇ , and R ⁇ -0 are H and one is a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl group that is unsubstituted or is substituted with up to three atoms that are the same or different and are oxygen or nitrogen atoms.
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 13 and R 14 are all H, or R 11 and R-L 3 are H and R-*- 2 and R-*- 4 are H or D, or one of the pair R 11 and R 12 or the pair R 13 and R 14 together with the depicted ring form a saturated or unsaturated 6-membered ring, and the other pair are each H or they are H and D as recited herein (in this subparagraph) .
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of Formula A and all of the remaining formulas disclosed herein is also contemplated.
  • a compound of Formula A corresponds in structure to either Formula B or Formula C.
  • G and W are selected from the group consisting of NR 20 , NR 7 , CH2, S and 0, where R 2 and
  • R ⁇ and R ⁇ are the same or different and are C(H) V (D)J 1 where each of v and h is 0, 1, 2 or
  • a preferred compound of one or more of Formulas A, B and C includes the following:
  • a preferred compound of Formulas A and B has the structure of Formula I
  • R8 and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH 2 , CHD or CD 2 .
  • a compound of Formulas A and C has the structure of Formula IV
  • R8 and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH 2 , CHD or CD 2 .
  • R ⁇ is H
  • one of n and m is zero and the remaining Z or Q is CH2
  • D and F are the same or different and are CH2
  • CHD or CD2 a compound of Formulas A, C and IV has the structure of Formula V
  • R ⁇ have a Hammett sigma value for a para-position substituent that is about -0.7 to about zero, and more preferably, a Hammett sigma value for a para-position substituent that is about -0.3 to about -0.1.
  • An R 2 group is preferably a H or C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl, with a cyclopropylmethyl group being preferred.
  • R-L preferably has a Hammett sigma value for a para- position substituent that is greater than -0.2, and more preferably, a Hammett sigma value for a para- position substituent that is zero or positive (greater than zero) .
  • G and W are both NR 2 or NR 7 and that R 2 and R 7 both be H, so that both G and W are NH, and that one of Z and Q being C(O) .
  • Hammett sigma values are well known in organic chemistry and those values for para-position substituents reflect both electron donation or withdrawal via an inductive effect, but also are understood to reflect a resonance effect. It is noted that the recited para-position sigma value is utilized regardless of the actual position of the substituent on the aromatic ring. For Hammett sigma values see, for example, U.S. Patents No. 7,473,477, No. 5,811,521, No. 4,746,651, and No . 4,548,905. A list of Hammett sigma values can be found in J.
  • a contemplated aromatic ring (aryl) system of circle A of one of the contemplated compounds preferably contains a single aromatic ring, but can also contain two fused aromatic rings.
  • An illustrative circle A aromatic ring system is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl ( 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, 1, 2, 4-triazinyl and 1 , 2 , 3-triazinyl ) , furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, naphthyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, quinazolyl, cinnolinyl
  • An illustrative single-ringed aryl or heteroaryl group of a circle A group or of a substituent of circle A, MAr is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl ( 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, 1 , 2 , 4-triazinyl and 1, 2, 3-triazinyl) , furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl and isothiazolyl groups.
  • Phenyl, pyridinyl and furanyl are a preferred aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system of circle A, with phenyl being more preferred. Phenyl, pyridinyl and furanyl are also preferred single- ringed aryl or heteroaryl groups, Ar, of a MAr substituent, with phenyl being particularly preferred.
  • X and Y can form a sulfonamide, a carboxamido, a urea, a guanidino or methylene linkage from the circle A ring system to a depicted nitrogen atom of the central spiro rings.
  • That formula defines a double ringed, substituted spiro compound that can have two six-membered rings or one six- and one five- membered ring, as when one of "m" and "n" is one and the other zero.
  • One of those rings (the lower ring in the formulas) contains one nitrogen atom in the 6-membered ring and the remaining ring atoms are carbons.
  • the ring that can contain 5- or 6-ring atoms (upper ring in the formulas) can contain one ring nitrogen and four or five carbons, or two nitrogens, a nitrogen and a sulfur or a nitrogen and an oxygen atom along with three or four ring carbons.
  • Illustrative central spiro rings are shown below where wavy lines are used to indicate the presence of covalent bonds to other entities, and where R ⁇ is defined above and R ⁇ is H for clarity.
  • Illustrative compounds of Formula A in which d and e are each zero and R , R12 anc ⁇ R13 are each H have asymmetric spiro ring structures a few of which are shown below with wavy lines indicating the presence of covalent bonds to other entities, and R ⁇ is defined above and R° is again H for clarity.
  • n is zero, e and g are both zero and R , R!2 anc ⁇ R13 are a ⁇ ⁇ so ⁇ he central ring is a spiro 5,6-ring system whose 6-membered ring is unsubstituted and in which the spiro bonds are in the 4-position relative to the nitrogen of the 6-membered ring.
  • W be 0 or
  • X be SO2 (sulfonyl) .
  • the aromatic substituent, the circle A, is linked to one nitrogen atom of the spiro rings by a X group that is SO 2 , C(O), CH 2 , CD 2 , OC(O), NHC(NH) or
  • the resulting aromatic substituent is thereby linked to the spiro ring portion by a sulfonamide, an amide, a methylene, a urea or a urethane linkage.
  • Aryl sulfonamide bridges, aryl amide bridges and phenylmethylene bridges (benzyl compounds) are preferred, with aryl sulfonamides being particularly preferred.
  • Formulas A and B, and that embodies one or more of the above separate preferences is a compound whose structure corresponds to that of Formula I
  • a particularly preferred compound of Formula I is selected from the group consisting of In another embodiment, a contemplated compound corresponds in structure to Formula II
  • particularly preferred compounds include those selected from the group consisting of
  • a particularly preferred compound of Formulas A and B is a compound of Formula III
  • a particular compound of Formula III is selected from the group consisting of
  • a particularly preferred compound of Formulas A and C is a compound of Formula IV
  • a particularly preferred compound of Formula IV has the structure
  • a particularly preferred compound of Formulas A and C is a compound of Formula V
  • a particularly preferred compound of Formula V corresponds in structure to
  • compound of Formulas A and C has the structure of Formula VI
  • a particularly preferred compound of Formula VI corresponds in structure to
  • the present invention also contemplates a method of treatment to reduce one or both of pain and inflammation in a treated mammal.
  • a compound of Formulas A, B, C, I, II, III, IV, V and VI or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt present in an analgesic effective amount dissolved or dispersed in a physiologically tolerable diluent can be and preferably is used in such a treatment.
  • Such compositions and methods are discussed further hereinafter .
  • a contemplated compound is selected in part using a method for determining the ability of a candidate FLNA-binding compound, other than naloxone or naltrexone, to inhibit the interaction of the mu opioid receptor with filamin A (FLNA) and thereby prevent the mu opioid receptor from coupling to Gs proteins (Gs) .
  • FLNA filamin A
  • That method comprises the steps of: (a) admixing the candidate FLNA-binding compound (alone if such FLNA-binding compound also stimulates MOR or with a MOR agonist otherwise) with mammalian cells that contain the mu opioid receptor and FLNA in their native conformations and relative orientations, the opioid agonist being present in an agonist effective amount and/or being administered in a repeated, chronic manner the FLNA-binding compound being present in an FLNA-binding effective amount; and (b) determining inhibition of the interaction of the mu opioid receptor with the G protein by analysis of the presence or the absence of the Gas subunit of Gs protein, wherein the absence of the Gas subunit indicates inhibition of the interaction of the mu opioid receptor with the Gs protein.
  • the analysis of Gs protein coupling by the mu opioid receptor and downstream effects elicited by admixing mammalian cells with a before-defined compound can be conducted by any one or more of several methods such as for example co- immunoprecipitation of Ga proteins with MOR, Western blot detection of MOR in immunoprecipitates, and densitometric quantification of Western blots.
  • a compound of the invention can be provided for use by itself, or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
  • substituent groups can provide an acid functionality
  • a contemplated compound of any of Formulas A-C and Formulas I-VI is an amine and can typically be used in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt derived from an inorganic or organic acid.
  • Exemplary salts include but are not limited to the following: acetate, adipate, alginate, citrate, aspartate, benzoate, benzenesulfonate, bisulfate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, digluconate, cyclopentanepropionate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, glucoheptanoate, glycerophosphate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, fumarate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy- ethanesulfonate, lactate, maleate, methanesulfonate, nicotinate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, oxalate, palmoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, succinate, tartrate,
  • salts with alkali metals or alkaline earth metals, such as sodium, potassium, calcium or magnesium or with organic bases or basic quaternary ammonium salts.
  • the salts can also be used as an aid in the isolation, purification or resolution of the compounds of this invention.
  • the acid used and the salt prepared need not be pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • a contemplated composition can be used in the manufacture of a medicament that is useful at least for lessening or reducing pain in a mammal that is in need, such as somatic, visceral, neuropathic or sympathetic pain, including musculoskeletal pain, inflammatory pain, burn pain, and pain from syndromes such as fibromyalgia and complex regional pain syndrome (CRPS) .
  • a contemplated composition can also be used in the manufacture of a medicament that is useful in reducing inflammation. Inasmuch as pain and inflammation are not always coincident, a contemplated composition is referred to as being used to reduce one or both of pain and inflammation, or a similar phrase.
  • a contemplated pharmaceutical composition contains an analgesia effective amount of a compound Formulas A, B or C and of Formulas I—VI or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof dissolved or dispersed in a physiologically tolerable carrier.
  • Such a composition can be administered to mammalian cells in vitro as in a cell culture, or in vivo as in a living, host mammal in need.
  • a contemplated composition is typically administered a plurality of times over a period of days. More usually, a contemplated composition is administered a plurality of times in one day.
  • a contemplated compound is active in the assays studied at micromolar amounts.
  • orally administered morphine exhibited an A50 value of 61.8 (52.4-72.9) mg/kg, and a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 43% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes.
  • Several orally administered compounds whose structures are shown in the Table of Correspondence hereinafter were compared at various dosages to determine a maximal amount of pain relief (antinociception amount) and the time after administration that that maximal pain relief occurred. Data from those studies are shown below.
  • contemplated compounds are quite active and potent, and that a skilled worker can readily determine an appropriate dosage level to achieve a desired amount of pain reduction, particularly in view of the relative activity of a contemplated compound compared to orally administered morphine .
  • a contemplated pharmaceutical composition can be administered orally (perorally) , parenterally, by inhalation spray in a formulation containing conventional nontoxic pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants, and vehicles as desired.
  • parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous injections, intravenous, intramuscular, intrasternal injection, or infusion techniques. Formulation of drugs is discussed in, for example, Hoover, John E., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pennsylvania; 1975 and Liberman, H. A. and Lachman, L., Eds., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Marcel Decker, New York, N. Y., 1980.
  • sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions can be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents.
  • the sterile injectable preparation can also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1, 3-butanediol .
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents that can be employed are water, Ringer's solution, and isotonic sodium chloride solution, phosphate-buffered saline.
  • Liquid pharmaceutical compositions include, for example, solutions suitable for parenteral administration. Sterile water solutions of an active component or sterile solution of the active component in solvents comprising water, ethanol, or propylene glycol are examples of liquid compositions suitable for parenteral administration.
  • sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides .
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectables.
  • Sterile solutions can be prepared by dissolving the active component in the desired solvent system, and then passing the resulting solution through a membrane filter to sterilize it or, alternatively, by dissolving the sterile compound in a previously sterilized solvent under sterile conditions .
  • Solid dosage forms for oral administration can include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules.
  • the compounds of this invention are ordinarily combined with one or more adjuvants appropriate to the indicated route of administration.
  • the compounds can be admixed with lactose, sucrose, starch powder, cellulose esters of alkanoic acids, cellulose alkyl esters, talc, stearic acid, magnesium stearate, magnesium oxide, sodium and calcium salts of phosphoric and sulfuric acids, gelatin, acacia gum, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, and/or polyvinyl alcohol, and then tableted or encapsulated for convenient administration.
  • Such capsules or tablets can contain a controlled-release formulation as can be provided in a dispersion of active compound in hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose.
  • the dosage forms can also comprise buffering agents such as sodium citrate, magnesium or calcium carbonate or bicarbonate. Tablets and pills can additionally be prepared with enteric coatings.
  • a mammal in need of treatment and to which a pharmaceutical composition containing a contemplated compound is administered can be a primate such as a human, an ape such as a chimpanzee or gorilla, a monkey such as a cynomolgus monkey or a macaque, a laboratory animal such as a rat, mouse or rabbit, a companion animal such as a dog, cat, horse, or a food animal such as a cow or steer, sheep, lamb, pig, goat, llama or the like.
  • a CNS tissue culture of cells from an illustrative mammal is often utilized, as is illustrated hereinafter.
  • a non-CNS tissue preparation that contains opioid receptors such as guinea pig ileumcan also be used.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is in unit dosage form.
  • the composition is divided into unit doses containing appropriate quantities of the active urea.
  • the unit dosage form can be a packaged preparation, the package containing discrete quantities of the preparation, for example, in vials or ampules.
  • Tables A-AE hereinafter illustrate several further contemplated compounds having various linking groups X, central spiro ring systems and aromatic ring systems, circle A, and wherein the wavy lines indicate the place of bonding between the circle A ring system and the central spiro ring system. Substituents on the aromatic or heteroaromatic ring systems are omitted for added clarity with the understanding that one to three substituents, Rl a ⁇ c , can be present bonded to each of the ring systems as discussed previously.
  • EXAMPLE 1 MOR agonist activity using GTP ⁇ S binding assay
  • MOR mu opiate receptor
  • Striatal tissue was homogenized in 10 volumes of ice cold 25 mM HEPES buffer, pH 7.4, which contained 1 mM EGTA, 100 mM sucrose, 50 ⁇ g/ml leupeptin, 0.04 mM PMSF, 2 ⁇ g/ml soybean trypsin inhibitor and 0.2% 2-mercaptoethanol .
  • the homogenates were centrifuged at 800 X g for 5 minutes and the supernatants were centrifuged at 49,000 X g for 20 minutes.
  • reaction buffer which contained 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 100 mM NaCl, 50 ⁇ g/ml leupeptin, 2 ⁇ g/ml soybean trypsin inhibitor, 0.04 mM PMSF and 0.02% 2-mercaptomethanol .
  • the resultant striatal membrane preparation (200 ⁇ g) was admixed and maintained (incubated) at 3O 0 C for 5 minutes in reaction buffer as above that additionally contained 1 mM MgCl 2 and 0.5 nM [ 35 S]GTPyS (0.1 ⁇ Ci/assay, PerkinElmer Life and Analytical Sciences) in a total volume of 250 ⁇ l and continued for 5 minutes in the absence or presence of 0.1 - 10 ⁇ M of an assayed compound of interest.
  • the reaction was terminated by dilution with 750 ⁇ l of ice-cold reaction buffer that contained 20 mM MgCl 2 and 1 mM EGTA and immediate centrifugation at 16,000 X g for 5 minutes .
  • the resulting pellet was solubilized by sonicating for 10 seconds in 0.5 ml of immunoprecipitation buffer containing 0.5% digitonin, 0.2% sodium cholate and 0.5% NP-40.
  • Normal rabbit serum (1 ⁇ l) was added to 1 ml of lysate and incubated at 25 0 C for 30 minutes.
  • Nonspecific immune complexes were removed by incubation with 25 ⁇ l of protein A/G-conjugated agarose beads at 25 0 C for 30 minutes followed by centrifugation at 5,000 X g at 4 0 C for 5 minutes. The supernatant was divided and separately incubated at 25°C for 30 minutes with antibodies raised against GCCo proteins (1:1,000 dilutions) .
  • the immunocomplexes so formed were collected by incubation at 25 0 C for 30 minutes with 40 ⁇ l of agarose-conjugated protein A/G beads and centrifugation at 5,000 X g at 4°C for 5 minutes. The pellet was washed and suspended in buffer containing 50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, and 1% NP-40. The radioactivity in the suspension was determined by liquid scintillation spectrometry.
  • the specificity of MOR activation of [ 35 S]GTPyS binding to GCCo induced by a selective compound was defined by inclusion of 1 ⁇ M ⁇ -funaltrexamine ( ⁇ -FNA; an alkylating derivative of naltrexone that is a selective MOR antagonist) .
  • DAMGO H-Tyr-D-Ala-Gly-N-MePhe-Gly-OH; 1 or 10 ⁇ M
  • EXAMPLE 2 FITC-NLX-based FLNA Screening Assay
  • BindTM NeutrAvidinTM High binding capacity coated 96- well plate, Pierce-ENDOGEN are washed three times with 200 ⁇ l of 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4 according to the manufacturer's recommendation.
  • Bn-VAKGL peptide (0.5 mg/plate) is dissolved in 50 ⁇ l DMSO and then added to 4450 ⁇ l of 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4, containing 100 mM NaCl and protease inhibitors (binding medium) as well as 500 ⁇ l superblock in PBS (Pierce-ENDOGEN) [final concentration for DMSO: 1%] .
  • the washed streptavidin-coated plates are contacted with 5 ⁇ g/well of Bn-VAKGL (100 ⁇ l) for 1 hour (incubated) with constant shaking at 25 0 C [50 ⁇ l of Bn-VAKGL peptide solution from B + 50 ⁇ l binding medium, final concentration for DMSO: 0.5%] .
  • the plate is washed three times with 200 ⁇ l of ice-cold 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4.
  • FITC-NLX FITC-tagged naloxone
  • binding medium 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4 containing 100 mM NaCl and protease inhibitors
  • the final assay volume is 100 ⁇ l .
  • the plate is washed twice with 100 ⁇ l of ice-cold 50 mM Tris, pH 7.4.
  • the signal, bound-FITC-NLX is detected using a DTX-880 multi-mode plate reader (Beckman) .
  • Each screening plate includes vehicle control (total binding) as well as naloxone (NLX) and/or naltrexone (NTX) as positive controls.
  • Compounds are tested in triplicate or quadruplicate. Percent inhibition of FITC-NLX binding for each compound is calculated [(Total FITC-NLX bound in vehicle - FITC-NLX bound in compound) /Total FITC-NLX bound in vehicle] x 100%] .
  • compounds that achieve approximately 60-70% inhibition at 10 ⁇ M are screened further at 1 and 0.1 ⁇ M concentrations.
  • the mouse "tail flick” test was used to assay the relative antinociceptive activity of compositions containing a compound to be assayed. This assay was substantially that disclosed by Xie et al., 2005 J. Neurosci 25:409-416.
  • the mouse hot-water tail-flick test was performed by placing the distal third of the tail in a water bath maintained at 52 0 C. The latency until tail withdrawal from the bath was determined and compared among the treatments. A 10 second cutoff was used to avoid tissue damage. Data are converted to percentage of antinociception by the following formula: (response latency - baseline latency) / (cutoff - baseline latency) x 100 to generate dose-response curves. Linear regression analysis of the log dose-response curves was used to calculate the A50 (dose that resulted in a 50% antinociceptive effect) doses and the 95% confidence intervals (CIs) . Relative potency was determined as a ratio of the A50 values. The significance of the relative potency and the confidence intervals are determined by applying the t test at p ⁇ 0.05.
  • the compound was administered twice daily for 7 days at an A90 dose (dose that results in a 90% antinociceptive effect in the 52 0 C warm-water tail- flick test), and the tail-flick test was performed daily after the a.m. dose.
  • a significant reduction in tail-flick latency on subsequent days compared to the Day 1 administration of the A90 dose indicates antinociceptive tolerance.
  • Assays were typically carried out separately using at least 32 and 56 mg/kg dosages, with some assays also separately carried out at 18 and 100 mg/kg.
  • Orally administered morphine exhibited an A50 value of 61.8 (52.4-72.9) mg/kg, and a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 43% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes.
  • Orally administered compound C0027 exhibited a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 70% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes
  • orally administered compound C0134M exhibited a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 50% at 56 mg/kg at about 30 minutes
  • compound C0066 exhibited a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 55% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes
  • compound C0108M exhibited a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 50% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes
  • compound C0090 exhibited a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 35% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes
  • compound C0089 exhibited a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 30% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes.
  • Each well contain 1.5 ml of culture medium composed of 50% MEM with Earl's salts, 2 mM L-glutamine, 25% Earl's balanced salt solution, 6.5 g/1 D-glucose, 20% fetal bovine serum, 5% horse serum, 25 mM HEPES buffer, 50 mg/ml streptomycin and 50 mg/ml penicillin. The pH value was adjusted to 7.2 with HEPES buffer.
  • Cultures were first incubated for 2 days to minimize the impact of injury from slice preparation. Incubator settings throughout the experiment were 36 0 C with 5% CO2. To induce tolerance, culture medium was removed and the culture insert containing the slices was gently rinsed twice with warm (37 0 C) phosphate-buffered saline (pH 7.2) before incubation in 0.1% fetal bovine serum-containing culture medium with 100 ⁇ M morphine for 1 hour twice daily (at 9-10 AM and 3-4 PM) for 7 days.
  • Tissues were returned to culture medium with normal serum after each drug exposure. Tissues were harvested 16 hours after the last drug exposure by centrifugation .
  • Synaptic membranes 400 ⁇ g were incubated with either 10 ⁇ M oxycodone or Kreb's- Ringer solution for 10 minutes before solubilization in 250 ⁇ l of immunoprecipitation buffer (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.5; 200 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA, 50 ⁇ g/ml leupeptin, 10 ⁇ g/ml aprotinin, 2 ⁇ g/ml soybean trypsin inhibitor, 0.04 mM PMSF and mixture of protein phosphatase inhibitors) .
  • immunoprecipitation buffer 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.5; 200 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA, 50 ⁇ g/ml leupeptin, 10 ⁇ g/ml aprotinin, 2 ⁇ g/ml soybean trypsin inhibitor, 0.04 mM PMSF and mixture of protein phosphatase inhibitors
  • striatal membrane lysates were immunoprecipitated with immobilized anti-G ⁇ s/olf or -G ⁇ o conjugated with immobilized protein G-agarose beads.
  • the level of MOR in anti-G ⁇ s/olf or -G ⁇ o immunoprecipitates was determined by Western blotting using specific anti- MOR antibodies.
  • brain slices were incubated with Kreb' s-Ringer (basal), 1 ⁇ M DAMGO, 1 ⁇ M forskolin or 1 ⁇ M DAMGO + 1 ⁇ M forskolin for 10 minutes at 37 0 C in the presence of 100 ⁇ M of the phosphodiesterase inhibitor IBMX.
  • Tissues were homogenized by sonication and protein precipitated with IM TCA. The supernatant obtained after centrifugation was neutralized using 50 mM Tris, pH 9.0.
  • the level of cAMP in the brain lysate was measured by a cAMP assay kit (PerkinElmer Life Science, Boston) according to manufacturer's instructions .
  • the latency to paw withdrawal from a noxious thermal stimulus is determined before and 3 hours after injection of a 50 ⁇ l solution of 2% carrageenan into the plantar surface of the hindpaw (Mogil et al . 1999 Pain 80:67-82) .
  • Animals are placed in plexiglas boxes on top of a glass plate maintained at 3O 0 C and allowed to habituate for two sessions (-24 hours and -1 hour) . Each habituation session lasts approximately 45-60 minutes.
  • an infrared heat source (Ugo Basile model 37370) is applied from under the glass plate onto the plantar surface of the right hind paw with the focus of the light beam no larger than a 3- to 5-mm diameter. The time to withdrawal of the hind paw from the heat source is recorded. A maximum cutoff of 30 seconds is used to prevent tissue damage. The intensity of the beam is set so that baseline latencies are approximately 15 seconds.
  • the post-carrageenan baseline is reestablished 3 hours after the carrageenan injections and only animals with a significant decrease in the latency of hind paw withdrawal from the thermal stimulus (thermal hypersensitivity) are tested. Animals are administered compounds, and hind paw withdrawal latencies are tested at various intervals after injection until the drug response falls below -20% MPE.
  • Antihyperalgesia thermo hypersensitivity
  • Paw edema is determined by use of a plethysmometer (Ugo Basile) in the mice undergoing the thermal latency testing. Paw volumes for the left and right hind paw are measured at the conclusion of the thermal latency testing (120 minutes after drug administration) .
  • a compound useful herein can be readily synthesized.
  • An illustrative synthetic scheme is shown below that preparation of compounds containing two sulfonyl linkages and one sulfonyl and one carbonyl linkage. That scheme can be readily adapted for the preparation of compounds containing two carbonyl linkages and one carbonyl and one sulfonyl linkage in the opposite configurations from those shown. More detailed syntheses are set out hereinafter .
  • Benzenesulfonyl chloride 200 mg, 1.13 mmol was added to a solution of piperidin-4-one (208 mg, 1.36 mmol) in 20 mL of pyridine was added benzenesulfonyl chloride (200 mg, 1.13 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The pyridine was then removed by evaporation under vacuum. To the residue was added CH 2 Cl 2 (50 mL) , then the CH 2 Cl 2 layer was washed with 3M HCl (30 mL x 3), dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated to give the crude product as a light yellow solid (138 mg, yield:51%) .
  • Cupric chloride (5 g) was added to a saturated solution of sulfur dioxide in CH 3 COOH (200 mL) and sulfur dioxide gas (from the reaction of NaHSO 4 and H 2 SO 4 ) . The gas was slowly bubbled into the solution for 4 hours until the solution became blue-green.
  • 4-amino-benzene-l-sulfonamide (20 g, 116 mmol) was added to a solution of concentrated HCl (40 mL) and H 2 O (50 mL) with stirring for 1 hour at 0°C.
  • a solution of sodium nitrate (8 g, 116 mmol) at such a rate of addition that the temperature did not rise above 0°C.
  • the compound C0065-2 was added into 20% hydrochloric acid (20 mL) and refluxed for 4 hours. Then the mixture was cooled to room temperature, phthalic acid was separated. The aqueous solution was washed by ether and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in NaOH (20%) and extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 for 3 times. The combined organic layers were dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated to obtain 1.1 g of the product as yellow oil (yield: 62%) .
  • Triethylamine (606 mg, 6.0 mmol) and piperidin-4-one (297 mg, 3.0 mmol) were added to a solution of 4-acetylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (656 mg, 3.0 mmol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solution was washed with water, dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated to obtain the title product as yellow solid (643 mg, Yield: 76%) .
  • Boc-D-Lys-OH (2.46 g, 9.4 mmol) was suspended in CH 2 OH (80 mL) , and 40% aq HCHO (1.6 mL, 19 mmol) was added, followed by 10% Pd/C (200 mg) .
  • the reaction mixture was stirred under H 2 for 2 days. Then the catalyst was filtered off, and the filtrate was concentrated to dryness. Diethyl ether (100 mL) was added to the resulting oil, and stirring was continued to obtain a white solid, which was filtered off and washed with diethyl ether (2.6 g, yield: 100%, confirmed by 1 H NMR) .
  • This compound is prepared using procedures illustrated elsewhere herein.
  • This compound is prepared using procedures illustrated elsewhere herein.
  • This compound is prepared using procedures illustrated elsewhere herein.
  • N-Boc-piperidin-4-one (3.0 g, 15 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of glycinamide hydrochloride (1.65 g, 15 mmol) in triethylamine (2.1 mL) and methanol (50 mL) .
  • the reaction was stirred under reflux overnight (about 18 hours) after which the solvent was removed in vacuo.
  • sample C0115 was recrystallized with chloroform and n-hexane to obtain the title product as white solid (19 mg, yield 14%) .
  • Triethylamine (0.73 mL, 5.25 mmol) was added to the suspension of 2-aminoacetamide hydrochloride (553 mg, 5.0 mmol) in 10 mL of methanol at room temperature. Then, 2-tetralone (730 mg, 5.0 mmol) was added dropwise and the resulting mixture stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. NaBH 4 (345 mg, 7.5 mmol) was added and stirred for 2 hours. After 2 hours, a white solid was removed via filtration and the filtrate was concentrated. Then 10 mL of water were added and the solution was extracted with ethyl acetate (EA) (20 mL x 3 ) .
  • EA ethyl acetate
  • the organic phase was collected and dried over Na 2 SO 4 .
  • the Na 2 SO 4 was removed and ethyl acetate was removed via evaporation.
  • the aqueous phase was extracted with ether.
  • the organic layer was collected and dried over Na 2 SO 4 .
  • the Na 2 SO 4 was removed and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to obtain the title product as purple solid (530 mg, yield: 52%) .
  • Piperidin-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (2.9 g) was added in 50 mL of acetonitrile and then 7.53 g of K 2 CO 3 and 4.28 g of bromocyclohexane was added. The mixture was heated to reflux overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue was diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 and washed with water (3x) and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na 2 SO 4 and evaporated to dryness to obtain 300 mg of the crude product as yellow solid (yield: 6%) . The residue was washed with 40 mL of diethyl ether and filtered to obtain 150 mg of yellow solid (yield: 3%) . The diethyl ether, which was used to wash the residue, was evaporated and 150 mg of yellow oil was obtained (yield: 3%)
  • Piperidin-4-one (250 mg) was dissolved in 15 mL of CHCI 3 and 0.7 mL of triethylamine was added. Then 522 mg of 4-methoxybenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride was added and the mixture was stirred at 70 0 C overnight. The solution was diluted with 30 mL of CHCl 3 and washed with 0.1 M HCl (aq, 30 mL x 3) and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na 2 SO 4 and evaporated to obtain the title product as yellow solid (580 mg, yield: 85.4%)

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

A compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt, composition and method are disclosed that can provide analgesia and reduce inflammation. A contemplated compound has a structure that corresponds to Formula A, wherein the R group substituents, d, e, f, k, n, m, D, E, F, K, G, P, Q, W, and Z are defined within.

Description

FILAMIN A BINDING ANTI-INFLAMMATORY AND ANALGESIC
TECHNICAL FIELD
This invention contemplates a composition and related method for providing long-lasting analgesia and reducing inflammation. More particularly, a compound, composition and method are described that utilize a small molecule to bind filamin A, to reduce inflammation and to preserve Gi/o signaling by the mu opioid receptor, known to interact with filamin A. Preferably, the compound reduces inflammation, preserves mu opioid receptor - Gi/o signaling and also functions as a mu opioid receptor agonist. Most preferably, the compound binds filamin A with picomolar or sub-picomolar affinity .
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Best known for cross-linking cytoplasmic actin into dynamic scaffolds to control cell motility, filamins are large cytoplasmic proteins increasingly found to regulate cell signaling by interacting with over 30 different receptors and signaling molecules (Feng et al . , 2004 Nat Cell Biol 6:1034-1038; Stossel et al . , 2001 Nature 2:138-145), including the mu opioid receptor (MOR) (Onoprishvili et al, 2003 MoI Pharmacol 64:1092-1100) . Filamins are dimerized through the last carboxy-terminal repeat near the transmembrane regions, allowing an intracellular V-shaped structure that is critical for function. There are three mammalian isoforms: filamin A (FLNA), B and C. FLNA controls cell motility by controlling the cycle of actin polymerization and depolymerization, allowing cells to move and to migrate. As actin depolymerization is linked to the inflammatory response, binding to FLNA suppresses inflammation by slowing actin polymerization and cell motility. Femtomolar naloxone and its inactive isomer, both known to bind FLNA (Wang et al . , 2008 PLoS One 3:el554), have been shown to reduce the microglial inflammatory response; i.e., proinflammatory factors and reactive oxygen species, of lipopolysaccaride-activated microglial cells (Liu et al, 2000 JPET 293:607-617; Qin et al . , 2005 FASEB J 19:550-557) . The glial inflammatory response has been implicated in neuropathic pain (Hutchinson et al., 2008 Eur J Neurosci 28:20-29) as well as the inflammatory neurotoxicity of neurodegenerative disease (Liu et al . , 2003 JPET 304:1-7) .
A second function of binding to FLNA is a beneficial regulation of opioid receptor signaling; i.e., a maintenance of coupling to Gi and Go proteins. MOR preferentially couples to pertussis toxin-sensitive G proteins, Gi/o (inhibitory/other), and inhibits the adenylyl cyclase/cAMP pathway (Laugwitz et al . , 1993 Neuron 10:233-242; Connor et al., 1999 Clin Exp Pharmacol Physiol 26:493-499) . Analgesia results from these MOR-linked inhibitory G protein (Gi/o) signaling cascades and related ion channel interactions that suppress cellular activities by hyperpolarization .
Adaptive responses of opioid receptors contribute to the development of analgesic tolerance and physical dependence, and possibly also to components of opioid addiction. A critical adaptive response of the MOR is a switch in G protein coupling from its native Gi/o proteins to stimulatory Gs proteins, resulting in opposite effects on the cell upon activation as well as analgesic tolerance and physical dependence (Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-261) . Prevention of this G protein coupling switch by agents that bind filamin A (Wang et al, 2008 PLoS One 3:el554), a scaffolding protein known to interact with MOR, can alleviate unwanted adaptive responses to continued opioid administration.
A chronic opioid-induced switch to Gs coupling by MOR can cause excitatory signaling, by activation of adenylyl cyclase, in place of the usual inhibitory signaling or inhibition of adenylyl cyclase (Crain et al . , 1992 Brain Res 575:13-24; Crain et al . , 2000 Pain 84:121-131; Gintzler et al . , 2001 MoI Neurobiol 21:21-33; Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-261) . This switch in G protein coupling from Gi/o to Gs (Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-261; Chakrabarti et al . , 2005 MoI Brain Res 135:217-224) may be a result of the decreased efficiency of coupling to the native G proteins, the usual index of desensitization (Sim et al., 1996 J Neurosci 16:2684-2692) and still commonly considered the reason for analgesic tolerance.
The chronic opioid-induced MOR - G protein coupling switch is accompanied by stimulation of adenylyl cyclase II and IV by MOR-associated Gβγ dimers (Chakrabarti et al . , 1998 MoI Pharmacol 54:655-662; Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-
261) . The interaction of the Gβγ dimer with adenylyl cyclase had previously been postulated to be the sole signaling change underlying the excitatory effects of opiates (Gintzler et al . , 2001 MoI Neurobiol 21:21- 33) . It has further been shown that the Gβγ that interacts with adenylyl cyclases originates from the Gs protein coupling to MOR and not from the Gi/o proteins native to MOR (Wang et al . , 2006 J Neurobiol 66:1302-1310) .
Thus, MORs are normally inhibitory G protein-coupled receptors that couple to Gi or Go proteins to inhibit adenylyl cyclase and decrease production of the second messenger cAMP, as well as to suppress cellular activities via ion channel- mediated hyperpolarization . Opioid analgesic tolerance and dependence are also associated with that switch in G protein coupling by MOR from Gi/o to Gs (Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-261) . This switch results in activation of adenylyl cyclase that provides essentially opposite, stimulatory, effects on the cell.
Controlling this switch in G protein coupling by MOR is the scaffolding protein FLNA, and compounds that bind a particular segment of FLNA with high affinity, like naloxone (NLX) and naltrexone (NTX), can prevent this switch (Wang et al, 2008 PLoS One 3:el554) and the associated analgesic tolerance and dependence (Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-261) . This switch in G protein coupling also occurs acutely, though transiently, and is potentially linked to the acute rewarding or addictive effects of opioid drugs, through CREB activation as a result of increased cAMP accumulation (Wang et al . , 2009 PLoS ONE 4(l) :e4282) .
Ultra-low-dose NLX or NTX have been shown to enhance opioid analgesia, minimize opioid tolerance and dependence (Crain et al . , 1995 Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 92:10540-10544; Powell et al . 2002. JPET 300:588-596), as well as to attenuate the addictive properties of opioids (Leri et al . , 2005 Pharmacol Biochem Behav 82:252-262; Olmstead et al . , 2005 Psychopharmacology 181:576-581) . An ultra-low dose of opioid antagonist was an amount initially based on in vitro studies of nociceptive dorsal root ganglion neurons and on in vivo mouse studies. It has long been hypothesized that ultra-low-dose opioid antagonists enhance analgesia and alleviate tolerance/dependence by blocking the excitatory signaling opioid receptors that underlie opioid tolerance and hyperalgesia (Crain et al . , 2000 Pain 84:121-131) . Later research has shown that the attenuation of opioid analgesic tolerance, dependence and addictive properties by ultra-low-dose, defined herein, naloxone or naltrexone, occurs by preventing the MOR - Gs coupling that results from chronic opiate administration (Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-261), and that the prevention of MOR - Gs coupling is a result of NLX or NTX binding to filamin A at approximately 4 picomolar affinity (Wang et al, 2008 PLoS One 3:el554) .
Found in all cells of the brain, CREB is a transcription factor implicated in addiction as well as learning and memory and several other experience- dependent, adaptive (or maladaptive) behaviors (Carlezon et al . , 2005 Trends Neurosci 28:436-445) . In general, CREB is inhibited by acute opioid treatment, an effect that is completely attenuated by chronic opioid treatment, and activated during opioid withdrawal (Guitart et al . , 1992 J Neurochem 58:1168- 1171) . However, a regional mapping study showed that opioid withdrawal activates CREB in locus coeruleus, nucleus accumbens and amygdala but inhibits CREB in lateral ventral tegemental area and dorsal raphe nucleus (Shaw-Luthman et al . , 2002 J Neurosci 22:3663-3672) .
In the striatum, CREB activation has been viewed as a homeostatic adaptation, attenuating the acute rewarding effects of drugs (Nestler, 2001 Am J Addict 10:201-217; Nestler, 2004 Neuropharmacology 47:24-32) . This view is supported by nucleus accumbens overexpression of CREB or a dominant- negative mutant respectively reducing or increasing the rewarding effects of opioids in the conditioned place preference test (Barot et al . , 2002 Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 99:11435-11440) . In conflict with this view, however, is the finding that reducing nucleus accumbens CREB via antisense attenuated cocaine reinforcement as assessed in self-administration (Choi et al., 2006 Neuroscience 137:373-383) . Clearly, CREB activation is implicated in addiction, but whether it directly contributes to the acute rewarding effects of drugs or initiates a homeostatic regulation thereof appears less clear.
The several-fold increase in pS133CREB reported by Wang et al . , 2009 PLoS ONE 4(l) :e4282 following acute, high-dose morphine may indicate acute dependence rather than acute rewarding effects. However, the transient nature of the MOR-Gs coupling correlating with this CREB activation suggests otherwise. In fact, the correlation of pS133CREB with the Gs coupling by MOR following this acute high-dose morphine exposure, as well as the similar treatment effects on both, suggest that this alternative signaling mode of MOR can contribute to the acute rewarding or addictive effects of opioids. This counterintuitive notion can explain the apparent paradox that ultra-low-dose NTX, while enhancing the analgesic effects of opioids, decreases the acute rewarding or addictive properties of morphine or oxycodone as measured in conditioned place preference or self-administration and reinstatement paradigms.
In considering analgesic tolerance, opioid dependence, and opioid addiction together as adaptive regulations to continued opioid exposure, a treatment that prevents MOR's signaling adaptation of switching its G protein partner can logically attenuate these seemingly divergent behavioral consequences of chronic opioid exposure.
Even though ultra-low-dose NTX blocks the conditioned place preference to oxycodone or morphine (Olmstead et al . , 2005 Psychopharmacology 181:576- 581), its co-self-administration only reduces the rewarding potency of these opioids but does not abolish self-administration outright (Leri et al . , 2005 Pharmacol Biochem Behav 82:252-262) . It is possible that a direct stimulatory effect on VTA neurons, as opposed to the proposed disinhibition via inhibition of GABA interneurons (Spanagel et al . , 1993 Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 89:2046-2050), can play some role in opioid reward. A MOR-Gs coupling mediation of reward, increasing with increasing drug exposure, is in keeping with current theories that the escalation of drug use signifying drug dependence can not indicate a "tolerance" to rewarding effects but instead a sensitization to rewarding effects (Zernig et al . , 2007 Pharmacology 80:65-119) .
The results reported in Wang et al . , 2009 PLoS ONE 4(l) :e4282 demonstrated that acute, high- dose morphine causes an immediate but transient switch in G protein coupling by MOR from Go to Gs similar to the persistent switch caused by chronic morphine. Ultra-low-dose NLX or NTX prevented this switch and attenuated the chronic morphine-induced coupling switch by MOR. The transient nature of this acute altered coupling suggests the receptor eventually recovers and couples to its native G protein .
With chronic opioid exposure, the receptor can lose the ability to recover and continue to couple to Gs, activating the adenylyl cyclase/cAMP pathway, upregulating protein kinase A, and phosphorylating CREB as one downstream effector example. The persistently elevated phosphorylated CREB can then shape the expression of responsive genes including those closely related to drug addiction and tolerance. Importantly, the equivalent blockade of Gs coupling and pS133CREB by the pentapeptide binding site of naloxone (NLX) and naltrexone (NTX) on FLNA further elucidates the mechanism of action of ultra-low-dose NLX and NTX in their varied effects.
These data further strengthen the regulation of MOR-Gs coupling by FLNA and that binding to FLNA or using a FLNA peptide decoy for MOR can prevent the altered MOR coupling, thereby attenuating tolerance, dependence and addictive properties associated with opioid drugs.
The combination of ultra-low-dose opioid antagonists with opioid agonists formulated together in one medication has been shown to alleviate many of these undesirable aspects of opioid therapy (Burns, 2005 Recent Developments in Pain Research 115-136, ISBN:81-308-0012-8) . This approach shows promise for an improvement in analgesic efficacy, and animal data suggests reduced addictive potential. The identification of the cellular target of ultra-low- dose NLX or NTX in their inhibition of mu opioid receptor - Gs coupling as a pentapeptide segment of filamin A (Wang et al . , 2008 PLoS ONE 3(2) :el554) has led to development of assays to screen against this target to create a new generation of pain therapeutics that can provide long-lasting analgesia with minimal tolerance, dependence and addictive properties. Importantly, the non-opioid cellular target of ultra-low-dose NLX or NTX, FLNA, provides potential for developing either a therapeutic combination of which one component is not required to be ultra-low-dose, or a single-entity novel analgesic .
The present invention identifies a compound that binds to filamin A (FLNA; the high-affinity binding site of naloxone [NLX] and naltrexone [NTX] ) , to reduce cell motility and inflammation as well as to prevent the Gi/o-to-Gs coupling switch of MOR and is similar to or more active than DAMGO in activating MOR.
BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention contemplates an analgesic compound, a composition containing that compound and a method of reducing pain in a host mammal in need thereof by administering a composition containing such a compound. A compound that corresponds in structure to Formula A is contemplated
Figure imgf000012_0001
In Formula A, G, P and W are selected from the group consisting of NR20, NR2, NR7, CH2, S and 0, where R2 and R7 are the same or different and are H, C(H)V(D)J1 where each of v and h is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and v+h = 3, C (H) q (D) r-aliphatic C]_-C]_]_ hydrocarbyl where each of q and r is 0, 1, or 2 and q+r = 0, 1 or 2, aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl sulfonyl [-S(O)2- aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl] or aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarboyl [acyl; -C (0) -aliphatic CQ-C]_I hydrocarbyl], and R2^ is X-circle A-R^ as defined hereinafter, with the provisos that i) only one of G,
P and W is NR20, ii) one of G, P and W must be NR20, and iii) P is NR2 when other than NR20. X is SO2, C(O), CH2, CD2, OC(O), NHC(NH) or NHC(O), preferably
SO2, C(O) or CH2, and most preferably S02> Q is CHR9 or C(O) and Z is CHR10 or C(O), and preferably, only one of Q and Z is C(O) . Each of d, e, f and k is either zero or one and the sum of (d + e + f + k) =
2, e is zero when d is zero, and k is zero when f is zero. D and F are the same or different and are CH or CD, and E and K are the same or different and are
CH2, CHD or CD2. Each of m and n is zero or one and the sum of m+n is 1 or 2, preferably 1. Circle A is an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system that contains one ring or two fused rings, and preferably contains a single ring. R^ represents up to three substituents, Rla, R^, and R1C, that themselves can be the same or different, wherein each of those three groups, Rla~c, is separately selected from the group consisting of H, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxy, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxycarbonyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C^-C7 hydrocarboyl, hydroxy-, trifluoromethyl- (-CF3) or halogen-substituted C]_-C7 hydrocarboyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbylsulfonyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxysulfonyl, halogen, nitro, phenyl, cyano, carboxyl, C]_-C7 hydrocarbyl carboxylate
[C(O)O-C1-C7 hydrocarbyl], carboxamide [C(O)NR3R4] or sulfonamide [S (0) 2NR3R4] , wherein the amido nitrogen in either amide group has the formula NR3R4 wherein R3 and R4 are the same or different and are H, C]_-C4 hydrocarbyl, or R3 and R4 together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7-membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, MAr, where M is -CH2-, -0- or -N=N- and Ar is a single- ringed aryl or heteroaryl group, and NR^R" wherein R^ and R^ are the same or different and are H, C1-C4 hydrocarbyl, C]_-C4 acyl, C]_-C4 hydrocarbylsulfonyl, or R^ and R^ together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7-membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur. R8, R9, and R10 are each H, which is preferred, or two of R8, R^, and R-L^ are H and one is a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl group that is unsubstituted or is substituted with up to three atoms that are the same or different and are oxygen or nitrogen atoms.
R11, R12, R13 and R14 are all H, or R11 and R13 are H and R12 and R14 are H or D, or one of the pair RH and R-*-2 or the pair R-^3 and R-*-4 together with the depicted ring form a saturated or unsaturated 6-membered ring, and the other pair are each H or they are H and D as recited in this paragraph (herein) . A pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of Formula A and all of the remaining formulas disclosed herein is contemplated.
In one preferred embodiment, a compound of Formula A corresponds in structure to Formula B.
Figure imgf000014_0001
In a compound that corresponds in structure to Formula B, G and W are selected from the group consisting of NR20, NR7, CH2, S and 0, where R2 and
R7 are the same or different and are H, C(H)V(D)J1 where each of v and h is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and v+h = 3, C (H) q (D) r-aliphatic C]_-C]_]_ hydrocarbyl where each of q and r is 0, 1, or 2 and q+r = 0, 1 or 2, aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl sulfonyl or aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarboyl, and R2^ is X—circle A—R-L as defined hereinafter, with the provisos that only one of G and
W is NR20 and that one of G and W must be NR20. X is SO2, C(O), CH2, CD2, OC(O), NHC(NH) or NHC(O); Q is
CHR9 or C(O); and Z is CHR10 or C(O) . Each of d, e, f and k is either zero or one and the sum of (d + e + f + k) = 2, e is zero when d is zero, and k is zero when f is zero. D and F are the same or different and are CH or CD and E and K are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2. R2 is preferably H, C(H)v(D)h where each of v and h is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and v+h = 3, C (H) q (D) r-aliphatic C1-C5 hydrocarbyl where each of q and r is 0, 1, or 2 and q+r = 0, 1 or 2, C]_-Cg aliphatic acyl [-C(0)-CQ-C5 aliphatic], or a
C]_-Cg aliphatic sulfonyl [-S (0) 2-CQ-C5 aliphatic] .
Circle A is an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system that contains one ring or two fused rings, preferably one ring; and group R^ is H or represents up to three substituents, R^a, R^-b, anc} R1°, that themselves can be the same or different, in which each of those three groups, R^-a~c, is separately selected from the group consisting of H, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxy, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxycarbonyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-C7 hydrocarboyl (acyl), hydroxy-
, trifluoromethyl- (-CF3) or halogen-substituted C]_-C7 hydrocarboyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbylsulfonyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxysulfonyl, halogen, nitro, phenyl, cyano, carboxyl, C1-C7 hydrocarbyl carboxylate, carboxamide or sulfonamide wherein the amido nitrogen in either group has the formula NR3R4 wherein R3 and R4 are the same or different and are H, C1-C4 hydrocarbyl, or R3 and R4 together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7-membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, MAr, where M is -CH2-, -0- or -N=N- and Ar is a single- ringed aryl or heteroaryl group, and NR^R6 wherein R^ and R^ are the same or different and are H, C1-C4 hydrocarbyl, C1-C4 acyl, C1-C4 hydrocarbylsulfonyl, or R^ and R" together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7-membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur.
Groups R^, R9 r and R-L^ are each H, which is preferred, or two of R°, R^, and R-^O are H and one is a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl group that is unsubstituted or is substituted with up to three atoms that are the same or different and are oxygen or nitrogen atoms.
Groups R11, R12, R13 and R14 are all H, or RH and R-*-3 are H and R-*-2 and R-*-4 are H or D, or one of the pair R11 and R12 or the pair R13 and R14 together with the depicted ring form a saturated or unsaturated 6-membered ring, and the other pair are each H or they are H and D as recited in this paragraph (herein) . A pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of Formula B is also contemplated. In another preferred embodiment, a compound of Formula A corresponds in structure to Formula C.
Figure imgf000017_0001
In a compound that corresponds in structure to Formula C, G and W are selected from the group consisting of NR2, NR7, CH2, S and 0, where R2 and R7 are the same or different and are H, C (H) v (D) ^ where each of v and h is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and v+h = 3,
C (H) q (D) r-aliphatic C]_-C]_]_ hydrocarbyl where each of q and r is 0, 1, or 2 and q+r = 0, 1 or 2, aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl, aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl sulfonyl or aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarboyl, with the proviso that that one of G and W must be NR2 or NR7. X is SO2, C(O), CH2, CD2, OC(O), NHC(NH) or NHC(O); Q is CHR9 or C(O); and Z is CHR10 or C(O), and preferably, only one of Q and Z is C(O) .
Each of d, e, f and k is either zero or one and the sum of (d + e + f + k) = 2, e is zero when d is zero, and k is zero when f is zero; D and F are the same or different and are CH or CD; E and K are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2; and each of m and n is zero or one and the sum of m+n is 1 or 2. Circle A is an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system that contains a single ring or two fused rings; and group R^ is H or represents up to three substituents, Rla, R^, and R1°, that themselves can be the same or different, in which each of the three groups, R^-a~c, is separately selected from the group consisting of H, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxy, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxycarbonyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-C7 hydrocarboyl, hydroxy-, trifluoromethyl- (-CF3) or halogen-substituted C1-C7 hydrocarboyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbylsulfonyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxysulfonyl, halogen, nitro, phenyl, cyano, carboxyl, C1-C7 hydrocarbyl carboxylate, carboxamide or sulfonamide wherein the amido nitrogen in either group has the formula NR^R4 wherein R^ and R^ are the same or different and are H, C1-C4 hydrocarbyl, or R^ and R^ together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7- membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, MAr, where M is -CH2-,
-0- or -N=N- and Ar is a single-ringed aryl or heteroaryl group, and NR^R6 wherein R^ and R^ are the same or different and are H, C1-C4 hydrocarbyl, C1-C4 acyl, C]_-C4 hydrocarbylsulfonyl, or R^ and R^ together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7- membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur. Groups R^, R^, and R10 are each H, or two of R^, R^, and R-^O are H and one is a is a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl group that is unsubstituted or is substituted with up to three atoms that are the same or different and are oxygen or nitrogen atoms; and groups R , R^-2, R13 anc} R14 are all H, or R11 and R13 are H and R12 and R14 are H or D, or one of the pair R^ and R-*-2 or the pair R13 and R!4 together with the depicted ring form a saturated or unsaturated 6-membered ring, and the other pair are each H or they are H and D as recited herein (in this subparagraph) . A pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of Formula C is also contemplated.
A preferred compound of Formulas A and B has the structure of Formula I
Figure imgf000019_0001
where X, W, Z, Q, n, m, circle A, R^, R2, R8 and the
R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH2,
CHD or CD2.
In another preferred embodiment, a compound of Formulas A and B has the structure of Formula II
Figure imgf000020_0001
where X, W, circle A, R1, R2 and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH2,
CHD or CD2.
In a further preferred embodiment, a compound of Formulas A and B has the structure of Formula III
Figure imgf000020_0002
where X, W, Z, Q, n, m, circle A, R1, R2 and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2.
In a still further preferred embodiment, a compound of Formulas A and C has the structure of Formula IV
Figure imgf000021_0001
where X, W, Z, Q, n, m, circle A, R1, R2,
R8 and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2.
In yet another preferred embodiment, compound of Formulas A and C has the structure of Formula V
R2
Figure imgf000021_0002
where X, W, circle A, R1, R2 and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH2,
CHD or CD2. In still another preferred embodiment, compound of Formulas A and C has the structure of Formula VI
Figure imgf000022_0001
where X, W, Z, Q, n, m, circle A, R^, R^ and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2.
In each of the above compounds of Formulas A, B, C and I-VI, it is preferred that X is C(O), CH2, CD2, or SO2, and separately preferred that W is
NR^, CH2, S or 0. It is also preferred that one of Q and Z be C(O) and the other be CH2. It is further separately preferred that wherein circle A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl ( 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, 1, 2, 4-triazinyl and 1 , 2 , 3-triazinyl ) , furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, naphthyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, quinazolyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, and benzopyrimidinyl . As can be seen from the above definitions, a contemplated compound can contain deuterated carbon atoms on either side of the "X" substituent. Deuterated compounds can be useful in studying the mechanism of drug interactions with living organisms for the elucidation of metabolic and biosynthetic pathways. Deuteration can also extend the half-life of a contemplated compound in vivo because a C-D bond is stronger than a C-H bond thereby requiring more energy input for bond cleavage. See, Blake et al . , 1975 J. Pharm. Sci. 64 (3) : 367-391 ; and Nelson et al . , 2003 Drug Metab. Dispos . 31 (12) : 1481-1498, and the citations therein. Contemplated deuterated compounds are prepared using well-known reactions.
A pharmaceutical composition is also contemplated. That composition comprises an above compound of Formulas A, B, C, and I—VI or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt dissolved or dispersed in a physiologically tolerable carrier. The compound is present in an effective analgesic amount. The composition is preferably in solid form as in a tablet of capsule.
A method of reducing one or both of pain and inflammation in a host mammal in need thereof is also contemplated. That method comprises administering to that host mammal a pharmaceutical composition as disclosed above. The host mammal for such a method is selected from the group consisting of a primate, a laboratory rodent, a companion animal, and a food animal. A composition can be administered a plurality of times over a period of days, as well as administered a plurality of times in one day. That administration can be perorally or parenterally . The present invention has several benefits and advantages.
One benefit is anti-inflammatory action combined with analgesia by a compound with a novel mechanism of action for both that does not have a narcotic structure.
An advantage of the invention is that analgesia can be provided by administration of a contemplated composition either perorally or parenterally .
A further benefit of the invention is that as indicated by the initial data, a contemplated compound provides the analgesic effects characteristic of opioid drugs but does not cause analgesic tolerance or dependence.
Another advantage of the invention as also indicated by the initial data is that a contemplated compound provides the analgesic effects characteristic of opioid drugs and does not have the addictive potential of opioid drugs.
Still further benefits and advantages will be apparent to a skilled worker from the description that follows.
ABBREVIATIONS AND SHORT FORMS The following abbreviations and short forms are used in this specification.
"MOR" means μ opioid receptor "FLNA" means filamin A "NLX" means naloxone "NTX" means naltrexone "Gi/o" means G protein inhibitory/other subtype, inhibits adenylyl cyclase
"Gs" means G protein stimulatory subtype, stimulates adenylyl cyclase
"Gβγ" means G protein beta gamma subunit "cAMP" means cyclic adenosine monophosphate "CREB" means cAMP Response Element Binding protein
"IgG" means Immunoglobulin G
DEFINITIONS
In the context of the present invention and the associated claims, the following terms have the following meanings:
The articles "a" and "an" are used herein to refer to one or to more than one (i.e., to at least one) of the grammatical object of the article. By way of example, "an element" means one element or more than one element.
As used herein, the term "hydrocarbyl" is a short hand term for a non-aromatic group that includes straight and branched chain aliphatic as well as alicyclic groups or radicals that contain only carbon and hydrogen. Inasmuch as alicyclic groups are cyclic aliphatic groups, such substituents are deemed hereinafter to be subsumed within the aliphatic groups. Thus, alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups are contemplated, whereas aromatic hydrocarbons such as phenyl and naphthyl groups, which strictly speaking are also hydrocarbyl groups, are referred to herein as aryl groups, substituents, moieties or radicals, as discussed hereinafter. An aralkyl substituent group such as benzyl is deemed an aromatic group as being an aromatic ring bonded to an X group, where X is CH2. A substituent group containing both an aliphatic ring and an aromatic ring portion such as tetralin (tetrahydronaphthalene) that is linked directly through the aliphatic portion to the depicted ring containing the W group is deemed a non-aromatic, hydrocarbyl group. On the other hand, a similar group bonded directly via the aromatic portion, is deemed to be a substituted aromatic group. Where a specific aliphatic hydrocarbyl substituent group is intended, that group is recited; i.e., C1-C4 alkyl, methyl or dodecenyl .
Exemplary hydrocarbyl groups contain a chain of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, and preferably 1 to about 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms of an alkyl group.
A particularly preferred hydrocarbyl group is an alkyl group. As a consequence, a generalized, but more preferred substituent can be recited by replacing the descriptor "hydrocarbyl" with "alkyl" in any of the substituent groups enumerated herein.
Examples of alkyl radicals include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, iso-amyl, hexyl, octyl, decyl, dodecyl and the like. Examples of suitable alkenyl radicals include ethenyl (vinyl), 2-propenyl, 3-propenyl, 1, 4-pentadienyl, 1, 4-butadienyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, 3-butenyl, decenyl and the like. Examples of alkynyl radicals include ethynyl, 2-propynyl, 3-propynyl, decynyl, 1-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 3-butynyl, and the like.
Usual chemical suffix nomenclature is followed when using the word "hydrocarbyl" except that the usual practice of removing the terminal "yl" and adding an appropriate suffix is not always followed because of the possible similarity of a resulting name to one or more substituents . Thus, a hydrocarbyl ether is referred to as a "hydrocarbyloxy" group rather than a "hydrocarboxy" group as may possibly be more proper when following the usual rules of chemical nomenclature. Illustrative hydrocarbyloxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, and cyclohexenyloxy groups. On the other hand, a hydrocarbyl group containing a -C(O)- functionality is referred to as a hydrocarboyl (acyl) and that containing a -C(O)O- is a hydrocarboyloxy group inasmuch as there is no ambiguity. Exemplary hydrocarboyl and hydrocarboyloxy groups include acyl and acyloxy groups, respectively, such as acetyl and acetoxy, acryloyl and acryloyloxy.
Carboxyl-related linking groups between the central spiro ring system and an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system, circle A, include several types of ester and amide bonds. Illustrative of such bonds are sulfonamide, sulfonate and thiosulfonate esters that can be formed between a Sθ2-containing group and an amine, oxygen or sulfur atom, respectively. Amide, ester and thioester links can be formed between an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring containing a C(O) group and a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom, respectively. Similarly, a guanidino linker can be formed between an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring containing a NHC(NH) group and a nitrogen, a urethane, carbonate or thiocarbonate can be formed between an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring containing a OC(O) group and a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, respectively. A compound containing a urea linker, urethane linker or isothiourea linker [NHC(O)S] can be formed between an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring containing a NHC(O) group and a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, respectively.
A "carboxyl" substituent is a -C(O)OH group. A C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl carboxylate is a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl ester of a carboxyl group. A carboxamide is a -C(O)NR3R4 substituent, where the R groups are defined elsewhere. Similarly, a sulfonamide is a -S(O)2NR3R4 substituent, where the R groups are defined hereinafter. Illustrative R^ and R^ groups that together with the depicted nitrogen of a carboxamide form a 5-7-membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, include morpholinyl, piperazinyl, oxathiazolyl, 1,2,3- triazolyl, 1, 2, 4-triazolyl, pyrazolyl, 1,2,4- oxadiazinyl and azepinyl groups.
As a skilled worker will understand, a substituent that cannot exist such as a C]_ alkenyl or alkynyl group is not intended to be encompassed by the word "hydrocarbyl", although such substituents with two or more carbon atoms are intended.
The term "aryl", alone or in combination, means a phenyl, naphthyl or other radical as recited hereinafter that optionally carries one or more substituents selected from hydrocarbyl, hydrocarbyloxy, halogen, hydroxy, amino, nitro and the like, such as phenyl, p-tolyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 4- (tert-butoxy) phenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl, and the like. The term "arylhydrocarbyl" , alone or in combination, means a hydrocarbyl radical as defined above in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by an aryl radical as defined above, such as benzyl, 2-phenylethyl and the like. The term "arylhydrocarbyloxycarbonyl" , alone or in combination, means a radical of the formula - C (0) -O-arylhydrocarbyl in which the term "arylhydrocarbyl" has the significance given above. An example of an arylhydrocarbyloxycarbonyl radical is benzyloxycarbonyl . The term "aryloxy" means a radical of the formula aryl-0- in which the term aryl has the significance given above. The term "aromatic ring" in combinations such as substituted-aromatic ring sulfonamide, substituted-aromatic ring sulfinamide or substituted-aromatic ring sulfenamide means aryl or heteroaryl as defined above.
As used herein, the term "binds" refers to the adherence of molecules to one another, such as, but not limited to, peptides or small molecules such as the compounds disclosed herein, and opioid antagonists, such as naloxone or naltrexone.
As used herein, the term "selectively binds" refers to binding as a distinct activity. Examples of such distinct activities include the independent binding to FLNA or a FLNA peptide, and the binding of a compound discussed above to a MOR.
As used herein, the term "FLNA-binding compound" refers to a compound that binds to the scaffolding protein filamin A, or more preferably to a polypeptide comprising residues -Val-Ala-Lys-Gly- Leu- (SEQ ID N0:l) of the FLNA sequence that correspond to amino acid residue positions 2561-2565 of the FLNA protein sequence as noted in the sequence provided at the web address: UniProtKB/Swiss-Prot entry P21333, FLNA-HUMAN, Filamin-A protein sequence. A FLNA-binding compound can inhibit the MOR-Gs coupling caused by agonist stimulation of the μ opioid receptor via interactions with filamin A, preferably in the 24th repeat region. When coadministered with an opioid agonist, a FLNA-binding compound can enhance the analgesic effects and improve the treatment of pain.
As used herein, the term "candidate
FLNA-binding compound" refers to a substance to be screened as a potential FLNA-binding compound. In preferred instances a FLNA-binding compound is also an opioid agonist. Additionally, a FLNA-binding compound can function in a combinatory manner similar to the combination of an opioid agonist and ultra- low-dose antagonist, wherein both FLNA and MOR are targeted by a single entity.
As used herein, the term "opioid receptor" refers to a G protein coupled receptor, located in the central nervous system that interacts with opioids. More specifically, the μ opioid receptor is activated by morphine causing analgesia, sedation, nausea, and many other side effects known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
As used herein, the term "opioid agonist" refers to a substance that upon binding to an opioid receptor can stimulate the receptor, induce G protein coupling and trigger a physiological response. More specifically, an opioid agonist is a morphine-like substance that interacts with MOR to produce analgesia .
As used herein, the term "opioid antagonist" refers to a substance that upon binding to an opioid receptor inhibits the function of an opioid agonist by interfering with the binding of the opioid agonist to the receptor. As used herein an "analgesia effective amount" refers to an amount sufficient to provide analgesia or pain reduction to a recipient host.
As used herein an "inflammation effective amount" refers to an amount sufficient to provide reduction of inflammation to a recipient host.
As used herein the term "ultra-low-dose" or "ultra-low amount" refers to an amount of compound that when given in combination with an opioid agonist is sufficient to enhance the analgesic potency of the opioid agonist. More specifically, the ultra-low-dose of an opioid antagonist is admixed with an opioid agonist in an amount about 1000- to about 10, 000, 000-fold less, and preferably about 10,000- to about 1, 000, 000-fold less than the amount of opioid agonist.
As used herein an "FLNA-binding effective amount" refers to an amount sufficient to perform the functions described herein, such as reduction or prevention of inflammation, inhibition of MOR-Gs coupling, prevention of the cAMP desensitization measure, inhibition of CREB S133 phosphorylation and inhibition of any other cellular indices of opioid tolerance and dependence, which functions can also be ascribed to ultra-low-doses of certain opioid antagonists such as naloxone or naltrexone. When a polypeptide or FLNA-binding compound of the invention interacts with FLNA, an FLNA-binding effective amount can be an ultra-low amount or an amount higher than an ultra-low-dose as the polypeptide or FLNA-binding compound will not antagonize the opioid receptor and compete with the agonist, as occurs with known opioid antagonists such as naloxone or naltrexone in amounts greater than ultra-low-doses. More preferably, when a polypeptide or VAKGL-binding compound of the present invention both interacts with FLNA and is an agonist of the mu opioid receptor, an FLNA-binding effective amount is an amount higher than an ultra-low-dose and is a sufficient amount to activate the mu opioid receptor.
As used herein the phrase "determining inhibition of the interaction of MOR with a Gs protein" refers to monitoring the cellular index of opioid tolerance and dependence caused by chronic or high-dose administration of opioid agonists to mammalian cells. More specifically, the mu opioid receptor - Gs coupling response can be identified by measuring the presence of the Gas (stimulatory) subunit, the interaction of MOR with the G protein complexes and formation of Gs-MOR coupling, the interaction of the Gβγ protein with adenylyl cyclase types II and IV, loss of inhibition or outright enhancement of cAMP accumulation, and the activation of CREB via phosphorylation of S133.
As used herein the term
"naloxone/naltrexone positive control" refers to a positive control method comprising steps discussed in a method embodiment, wherein the candidate FLNA-binding compound is a known opioid antagonist administered in an ultra-low amount, preferably naloxone or naltrexone.
As used herein the term "FLNA-binding compound negative control" refers to a negative control method comprising steps discussed in a method embodiment, wherein the candidate FLNA-binding compound is absent and the method is carried out in the presence of only opioid agonist. As used herein the term "pharmacophore" is not meant to imply any pharmacological activity. The term refers to chemical features and their distribution in three-dimensional space that constitutes and epitomizes the preferred requirements for molecular interaction with a receptor (U.S. Patent No. 6, 034, 066) .
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
It should be understood that the present disclosure is to be considered as an exemplification of the present invention, and is not intended to limit the invention to the specific embodiments illustrated. It should be further understood that the title of this section of this application ("Detailed Description of the Invention") relates to a requirement of the United States Patent Office, and should not be found to limit the subject matter disclosed herein.
The present invention contemplates a compound that binds to FLNA and also stimulates MOR, a composition containing that compound and method of its use to provide one or both of pain relief and reduction of inflammation. A contemplated compound can suppress inflammation and inhibit MOR-Gs coupling through interactions with FLNA and/or MOR.
In another aspect of the present invention, a contemplated compound inhibits or prevents the morphine-induced Gs protein coupling by MOR. That prevention of MOR-Gs coupling is believed to occur by preserving a particular interaction of filamin A and MOR. Downstream effects of preventing the MOR-Gs coupling include inhibition of cAMP accumulation and of cAMP Response Element Binding protein (CREB) activation in a manner resembling the activity of ultra-low-dose opioid antagonists naloxone and naltrexone .
In another aspect of the present invention, a FLNA-binding compound prevents or inhibits the MOR- Gs coupling while itself activating MOR.
The data collected in organotypic striatal slice cultures demonstrate that after 7 days of twice daily 1-hour exposures to oxycodone, MOR in striatum switch from Go to Gs coupling (compare vehicle to oxycodone conditions) . In contrast, a compound contemplated herein does not cause a switch to Gs coupling despite its ability to stimulate MOR as previously assessed by GTPγS binding that is blocked by beta-funaltrexamine, a specific MOR antagonist. These data imply that these compounds provide the analgesic effects characteristic of opioid drugs but do not cause analgesic tolerance or dependence, and do not have the addictive potential of opioid drugs.
A compound contemplated by the present invention binds to an above-defined FLNA polypeptide as well as stimulates MOR. A contemplated compound corresponds in structure to Formula A
Figure imgf000034_0001
In Formula A, each of G, K and W is selected from the group consisting of NR^O, NR^, NR^, CH2, S and O, where R^ and R2 are the same or different and are H, C (H) v (D) ^1 where each of v and h is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and v+h = 3, C (H) q (D) r-aliphatic C]_-C]_]_ hydrocarbyl where each of q and r is 0, 1, or 2 and q+r = 0, 1 or 2, aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl, aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl sulfonyl or aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarboyl (acyl), and R2^ is X—circle A-R^ as defined hereinafter, with the provisos that i) only one of G, K and W is NR20, ii) one of G, K and W must be NR20, and iii) when K is other than NR20, K is NR2.
X is SO2, C(O), CH2, CD2, OC(O), NHC(NH) or NHC(O), preferably SO2, C(O) or CH2, and most preferably SO2 # Q is CHR9 or C(O) and Z is CHR10 or C(O), and preferably, only one of Q and Z is C(O) .
Each of d, e, f and k is either zero or one and the sum of (d + e + f + k) = 2, e is zero when d is zero, and k is zero when f is zero; D and F are the same or different and are CH or CD; and E and K are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2.
Each of m and n is zero or one and the sum of m+n is 1 or 2, preferably 1.
Circle A is an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system that preferably contains a single ring, but can also contain two fused rings. R-L is H or represents up to three substituents, R^a, R^-b, anc} R1°, that themselves can be the same or different, wherein each of those three groups, R^-a~c, is separately selected from the group consisting of H, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxy, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxycarbonyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C^-C7 hydrocarboyl, hydroxy-, trifluoromethyl- (-CF3) or halogen-substituted C]_-C7 hydrocarboyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbylsulfonyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxysulfonyl, halogen, nitro, phenyl, cyano, carboxyl, C]_-C7 hydrocarbyl carboxylate
[C(O)O-C1-C7 hydrocarbyl], carboxamide [C(O)NR3R4] or sulfonamide [S (0) 2NR3R4] , wherein the amido nitrogen in either amide group has the formula NR3R4 in which R3 and R4 are the same or different and are H, C]_-C4 hydrocarbyl, or R3 and R4 together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7-membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, MAr, where M is -CH2-, -0- or -N=N- and Ar is a single- ringed aryl or heteroaryl group and NR^R6 wherein R^ and R^ are the same or different and are H, C1-C4 hydrocarbyl, C]_-C4 acyl, C]_-C4 hydrocarbylsulfonyl, or R^ and R" together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7-membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur.
R8, R9, and R10 are each H, which is preferred, or two of R8, R^, and R^-0 are H and one is a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl group that is unsubstituted or is substituted with up to three atoms that are the same or different and are oxygen or nitrogen atoms.
R11, R12, R13 and R14 are all H, or R11 and R-L3 are H and R-*-2 and R-*-4 are H or D, or one of the pair R11 and R12 or the pair R13 and R14 together with the depicted ring form a saturated or unsaturated 6-membered ring, and the other pair are each H or they are H and D as recited herein (in this subparagraph) .
A pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of Formula A and all of the remaining formulas disclosed herein is also contemplated.
In preferred embodiments, a compound of Formula A corresponds in structure to either Formula B or Formula C.
Figure imgf000037_0001
In a compound that corresponds in structure to Formula B, G and W are selected from the group consisting of NR20, NR7, CH2, S and 0, where R2 and
R7 are the same or different and are C(H)V(D)J1 where each of v and h is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and v+h = 3,
C (H) q (D) r-aliphatic C]_-C]_]_ hydrocarbyl where each of q and r is 0, 1, or 2 and q+r = 0, 1 or 2, aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl sulfonyl or aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarboyl, and R2^ is X—circle A-R^, with the provisos that only one of G and W is NR2^ and that one of G and W must be NR20. In a compound that corresponds in structure to Formula C, G and W are selected from the group consisting of NR^, NR^, CH2,
S and 0, where R^ and R^ are the same or different and are C(H)V(D)J1 where each of v and h is 0, 1, 2 or
3 and v+h = 3, C (H) q (D) r-aliphatic C]_-C]_]_ hydrocarbyl where each of q and r is 0, 1, or 2 and q+r = 0, 1 or 2, aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl sulfonyl or aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarboyl . In both of Formulas B and C, X, Z, Q, d, e, f, g, n, m, circle A, and all of the R groups not otherwise defined in this paragraph are as defined previously.
A preferred compound of one or more of Formulas A, B and C includes the following:
Figure imgf000038_0001
In one embodiment, a preferred compound of Formulas A and B has the structure of Formula I
Figure imgf000039_0001
where X, W, Z, Q, n, m, circle A, R1, R2,
R8 and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2.
In another preferred embodiment where R^ is H, one of n and m is zero and the remaining Z or Q is CH2, a compound of Formulas A, B and I has the structure of Formula II
Figure imgf000039_0002
where X, W, circle A, R^, R2 and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH2,
CHD or CD2.
In a further preferred embodiment, where R^ is H, a compound of Formulas A, B and I has the structure of Formula III
Figure imgf000040_0001
where X, W, Z, Q, circle A, R^, R2 and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, each of m and n is one so m + n = 2, and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2.
In a still further preferred embodiment, a compound of Formulas A and C has the structure of Formula IV
Figure imgf000040_0002
where X, W, Z, Q, n, m, circle A, R1, R2,
R8 and the R groups therein defined are as described previously, and D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2.
In yet another preferred embodiment where R^ is H, one of n and m is zero and the remaining Z or Q is CH2, and D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2, a compound of Formulas A, C and IV has the structure of Formula V
Figure imgf000041_0001
In still another preferred embodiment, where R° is H, a compound of Formulas A, C and I has the structure of Formula VI
Figure imgf000041_0002
where X, W, Z, Q, circle A, R^, R^ and the
R groups therein defined are as described previously, each of m and n is one so m + n = 2, and D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2.
Again, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of all of the compounds of Formulas A, B, C, and I—VI is contemplated. It is also noted that the previously mentioned preferences regarding apply to X, W, Z, Q, d, e, f, k, n, m, circle A, and all of the R groups apply to a compound of Formulas A, B, C, and I-VI.
In a compound of Formulas A, B and I, II and III, for enhanced potency as a MOR agonist, it is preferred that R^ have a Hammett sigma value for a para-position substituent that is about -0.7 to about zero, and more preferably, a Hammett sigma value for a para-position substituent that is about -0.3 to about -0.1. An R2 group is preferably a H or C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl, with a cyclopropylmethyl group being preferred.
In a compound of Formulas A, C and IV, V and VI, for enhanced potency as a MOR agonist, R-L preferably has a Hammett sigma value for a para- position substituent that is greater than -0.2, and more preferably, a Hammett sigma value for a para- position substituent that is zero or positive (greater than zero) . For enhanced specificity, it is also preferred that G and W are both NR2 or NR7 and that R2 and R7 both be H, so that both G and W are NH, and that one of Z and Q being C(O) .
Hammett sigma values are well known in organic chemistry and those values for para-position substituents reflect both electron donation or withdrawal via an inductive effect, but also are understood to reflect a resonance effect. It is noted that the recited para-position sigma value is utilized regardless of the actual position of the substituent on the aromatic ring. For Hammett sigma values see, for example, U.S. Patents No. 7,473,477, No. 5,811,521, No. 4,746,651, and No . 4,548,905. A list of Hammett sigma values can be found in J. Hine, Physical Organic Chemistry, 2nd ed., McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York page87 (1962) and at the web site : wiredchemist . com/chemistry/data/hammett_sigma_constants .
A contemplated aromatic ring (aryl) system of circle A of one of the contemplated compounds preferably contains a single aromatic ring, but can also contain two fused aromatic rings. An illustrative circle A aromatic ring system is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl ( 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, 1, 2, 4-triazinyl and 1 , 2 , 3-triazinyl ) , furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, naphthyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, quinazolyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, and benzopyrimidinyl .
An illustrative single-ringed aryl or heteroaryl group of a circle A group or of a substituent of circle A, MAr, is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl ( 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, 1 , 2 , 4-triazinyl and 1, 2, 3-triazinyl) , furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl and isothiazolyl groups.
Phenyl, pyridinyl and furanyl are a preferred aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system of circle A, with phenyl being more preferred. Phenyl, pyridinyl and furanyl are also preferred single- ringed aryl or heteroaryl groups, Ar, of a MAr substituent, with phenyl being particularly preferred. X and Y can form a sulfonamide, a carboxamido, a urea, a guanidino or methylene linkage from the circle A ring system to a depicted nitrogen atom of the central spiro rings.
Examining a compound of the above formulas more closely, it is seen that that formula defines a double ringed, substituted spiro compound that can have two six-membered rings or one six- and one five- membered ring, as when one of "m" and "n" is one and the other zero. One of those rings (the lower ring in the formulas) contains one nitrogen atom in the 6-membered ring and the remaining ring atoms are carbons. The ring that can contain 5- or 6-ring atoms (upper ring in the formulas) can contain one ring nitrogen and four or five carbons, or two nitrogens, a nitrogen and a sulfur or a nitrogen and an oxygen atom along with three or four ring carbons. Illustrative central spiro rings are shown below where wavy lines are used to indicate the presence of covalent bonds to other entities, and where R^ is defined above and R^ is H for clarity.
Figure imgf000044_0001
Figure imgf000045_0001
Illustrative compounds of Formula A in which d and e are each zero and R , R12 anc} R13 are each H have asymmetric spiro ring structures a few of which are shown below with wavy lines indicating the presence of covalent bonds to other entities, and R^ is defined above and R° is again H for clarity.
Figure imgf000045_0002
In preferred practice for the compounds of Formulas A, B and C, n is zero, e and g are both zero and R , R!2 anc} R13 are a±± ^ so ^he central ring is a spiro 5,6-ring system whose 6-membered ring is unsubstituted and in which the spiro bonds are in the 4-position relative to the nitrogen of the 6-membered ring.. It is separately preferred that W be 0 or
NR^. It is also preferred that X be SO2 (sulfonyl) .
The aromatic substituent, the circle A, is linked to one nitrogen atom of the spiro rings by a X group that is SO2, C(O), CH2, CD2, OC(O), NHC(NH) or
NHC(O), preferably SO2, C(O), CH2, or CD2, and most preferably SO2 # The resulting aromatic substituent is thereby linked to the spiro ring portion by a sulfonamide, an amide, a methylene, a urea or a urethane linkage. Aryl sulfonamide bridges, aryl amide bridges and phenylmethylene bridges (benzyl compounds) are preferred, with aryl sulfonamides being particularly preferred.
A particularly preferred compound of
Formulas A and B, and that embodies one or more of the above separate preferences is a compound whose structure corresponds to that of Formula I
R8
Figure imgf000046_0001
A particularly preferred compound of Formula I is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000047_0001
Figure imgf000047_0002
Figure imgf000047_0003
In another embodiment, a contemplated compound corresponds in structure to Formula II
Figure imgf000048_0001
Here, particularly preferred compounds include those selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000048_0002
Figure imgf000048_0003
Figure imgf000049_0001
Figure imgf000049_0002
Figure imgf000049_0003
Figure imgf000049_0004
Figure imgf000050_0001
In a further embodiment, a particularly preferred compound of Formulas A and B is a compound of Formula III
Figure imgf000050_0002
N
I
R2
A particular compound of Formula III is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000051_0001
In a further embodiment, a particularly preferred compound of Formulas A and C is a compound of Formula IV
Figure imgf000051_0002
A particularly preferred compound of Formula IV has the structure
Figure imgf000052_0001
In yet another embodiment, a particularly preferred compound of Formulas A and C is a compound of Formula V
R2
Figure imgf000052_0002
A particularly preferred compound of Formula V corresponds in structure to
Figure imgf000052_0003
Figure imgf000053_0001
Figure imgf000053_0002
Figure imgf000054_0001
In still another preferred embodiment, compound of Formulas A and C has the structure of Formula VI
Figure imgf000054_0002
A particularly preferred compound of Formula VI corresponds in structure to
Figure imgf000055_0001
The present invention also contemplates a method of treatment to reduce one or both of pain and inflammation in a treated mammal. A compound of Formulas A, B, C, I, II, III, IV, V and VI or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt present in an analgesic effective amount dissolved or dispersed in a physiologically tolerable diluent can be and preferably is used in such a treatment. Such compositions and methods are discussed further hereinafter .
In another aspect, a contemplated compound is selected in part using a method for determining the ability of a candidate FLNA-binding compound, other than naloxone or naltrexone, to inhibit the interaction of the mu opioid receptor with filamin A (FLNA) and thereby prevent the mu opioid receptor from coupling to Gs proteins (Gs) . That method comprises the steps of: (a) admixing the candidate FLNA-binding compound (alone if such FLNA-binding compound also stimulates MOR or with a MOR agonist otherwise) with mammalian cells that contain the mu opioid receptor and FLNA in their native conformations and relative orientations, the opioid agonist being present in an agonist effective amount and/or being administered in a repeated, chronic manner the FLNA-binding compound being present in an FLNA-binding effective amount; and (b) determining inhibition of the interaction of the mu opioid receptor with the G protein by analysis of the presence or the absence of the Gas subunit of Gs protein, wherein the absence of the Gas subunit indicates inhibition of the interaction of the mu opioid receptor with the Gs protein.
In one aspect, the analysis of Gs protein coupling by the mu opioid receptor and downstream effects elicited by admixing mammalian cells with a before-defined compound can be conducted by any one or more of several methods such as for example co- immunoprecipitation of Ga proteins with MOR, Western blot detection of MOR in immunoprecipitates, and densitometric quantification of Western blots.
Pharmaceutical Composition
A compound of the invention can be provided for use by itself, or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. Although substituent groups can provide an acid functionality, a contemplated compound of any of Formulas A-C and Formulas I-VI is an amine and can typically be used in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt derived from an inorganic or organic acid. Exemplary salts include but are not limited to the following: acetate, adipate, alginate, citrate, aspartate, benzoate, benzenesulfonate, bisulfate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, digluconate, cyclopentanepropionate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, glucoheptanoate, glycerophosphate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, fumarate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy- ethanesulfonate, lactate, maleate, methanesulfonate, nicotinate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, oxalate, palmoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, succinate, tartrate, thiocyanate, tosylate, mesylate and undecanoate.
Other compounds useful in this invention that contain acid functionalities can also form salts. Examples include salts with alkali metals or alkaline earth metals, such as sodium, potassium, calcium or magnesium or with organic bases or basic quaternary ammonium salts.
The reader is directed to Berge, 1977 J. Pharm. Sci. 68(1) : 1-19 for lists of commonly used pharmaceutically acceptable acids and bases that form pharmaceutically acceptable salts with pharmaceutical compounds .
In some cases, the salts can also be used as an aid in the isolation, purification or resolution of the compounds of this invention. In such uses, the acid used and the salt prepared need not be pharmaceutically acceptable.
A contemplated composition can be used in the manufacture of a medicament that is useful at least for lessening or reducing pain in a mammal that is in need, such as somatic, visceral, neuropathic or sympathetic pain, including musculoskeletal pain, inflammatory pain, burn pain, and pain from syndromes such as fibromyalgia and complex regional pain syndrome (CRPS) . A contemplated composition can also be used in the manufacture of a medicament that is useful in reducing inflammation. Inasmuch as pain and inflammation are not always coincident, a contemplated composition is referred to as being used to reduce one or both of pain and inflammation, or a similar phrase.
A contemplated pharmaceutical composition contains an analgesia effective amount of a compound Formulas A, B or C and of Formulas I—VI or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof dissolved or dispersed in a physiologically tolerable carrier. Such a composition can be administered to mammalian cells in vitro as in a cell culture, or in vivo as in a living, host mammal in need.
A contemplated composition is typically administered a plurality of times over a period of days. More usually, a contemplated composition is administered a plurality of times in one day.
As is seen from the data that follow in the table below, a contemplated compound is active in the assays studied at micromolar amounts. In the laboratory mouse tail flick test, orally administered morphine exhibited an A50 value of 61.8 (52.4-72.9) mg/kg, and a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 43% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes. Several orally administered compounds whose structures are shown in the Table of Correspondence hereinafter were compared at various dosages to determine a maximal amount of pain relief (antinociception amount) and the time after administration that that maximal pain relief occurred. Data from those studies are shown below.
Figure imgf000058_0001
Figure imgf000059_0001
It is thus seen that the contemplated compounds are quite active and potent, and that a skilled worker can readily determine an appropriate dosage level to achieve a desired amount of pain reduction, particularly in view of the relative activity of a contemplated compound compared to orally administered morphine .
A contemplated pharmaceutical composition can be administered orally (perorally) , parenterally, by inhalation spray in a formulation containing conventional nontoxic pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants, and vehicles as desired. The term parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous injections, intravenous, intramuscular, intrasternal injection, or infusion techniques. Formulation of drugs is discussed in, for example, Hoover, John E., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pennsylvania; 1975 and Liberman, H. A. and Lachman, L., Eds., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Marcel Decker, New York, N. Y., 1980.
Injectable preparations, for example, sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions can be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. The sterile injectable preparation can also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1, 3-butanediol . Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that can be employed are water, Ringer's solution, and isotonic sodium chloride solution, phosphate-buffered saline. Liquid pharmaceutical compositions include, for example, solutions suitable for parenteral administration. Sterile water solutions of an active component or sterile solution of the active component in solvents comprising water, ethanol, or propylene glycol are examples of liquid compositions suitable for parenteral administration.
In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides . In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectables. Dimethyl acetamide, surfactants including ionic and non-ionic detergents, polyethylene glycols can be used. Mixtures of solvents and wetting agents such as those discussed above are also useful.
Sterile solutions can be prepared by dissolving the active component in the desired solvent system, and then passing the resulting solution through a membrane filter to sterilize it or, alternatively, by dissolving the sterile compound in a previously sterilized solvent under sterile conditions .
Solid dosage forms for oral administration can include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules. In such solid dosage forms, the compounds of this invention are ordinarily combined with one or more adjuvants appropriate to the indicated route of administration. If administered per os, the compounds can be admixed with lactose, sucrose, starch powder, cellulose esters of alkanoic acids, cellulose alkyl esters, talc, stearic acid, magnesium stearate, magnesium oxide, sodium and calcium salts of phosphoric and sulfuric acids, gelatin, acacia gum, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, and/or polyvinyl alcohol, and then tableted or encapsulated for convenient administration. Such capsules or tablets can contain a controlled-release formulation as can be provided in a dispersion of active compound in hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose. In the case of capsules, tablets, and pills, the dosage forms can also comprise buffering agents such as sodium citrate, magnesium or calcium carbonate or bicarbonate. Tablets and pills can additionally be prepared with enteric coatings.
A mammal in need of treatment and to which a pharmaceutical composition containing a contemplated compound is administered can be a primate such as a human, an ape such as a chimpanzee or gorilla, a monkey such as a cynomolgus monkey or a macaque, a laboratory animal such as a rat, mouse or rabbit, a companion animal such as a dog, cat, horse, or a food animal such as a cow or steer, sheep, lamb, pig, goat, llama or the like.
Where in vitro mammalian cell contact is contemplated, a CNS tissue culture of cells from an illustrative mammal is often utilized, as is illustrated hereinafter. In addition, a non-CNS tissue preparation that contains opioid receptors such as guinea pig ileumcan also be used.
Preferably, the pharmaceutical composition is in unit dosage form. In such form, the composition is divided into unit doses containing appropriate quantities of the active urea. The unit dosage form can be a packaged preparation, the package containing discrete quantities of the preparation, for example, in vials or ampules.
EXAMPLES
The present invention is described in the following examples which are set forth to aid in the understanding of the invention, and should not be construed to limit in any way the invention as defined in the claims which follow thereafter.
The experiments described herein were carried out on organotypic striatal slices from male Sprague Dawley rats (200 to 25Og) purchased from Taconic (Germantown, NY) . Rats were housed two per cage and maintained on a regular 12-hour light/dark cycle in a climate-controlled room with food and water available ad libitum and sacrificed by rapid decapitation. All data are presented as mean ± standard error of the mean. Treatment effects were evaluated by two-way ANOVA followed by Newman-Keul ' s test for multiple comparisons. Two-tailed Student's t test was used for post hoc pairwise comparisons. The threshold for significance was p<0.05.
The following Table of Correspondence shows the structures of the compounds discussed herein and their identifying numbers.
Figure imgf000062_0001
Figure imgf000063_0001
Figure imgf000063_0002
Figure imgf000064_0001
Figure imgf000064_0002
Figure imgf000065_0001
Figure imgf000065_0002
Figure imgf000065_0003
Figure imgf000066_0001
Figure imgf000066_0002
Figure imgf000067_0001
Tables A-AE hereinafter illustrate several further contemplated compounds having various linking groups X, central spiro ring systems and aromatic ring systems, circle A, and wherein the wavy lines indicate the place of bonding between the circle A ring system and the central spiro ring system. Substituents on the aromatic or heteroaromatic ring systems are omitted for added clarity with the understanding that one to three substituents, Rla~c, can be present bonded to each of the ring systems as discussed previously.
Table A
Figure imgf000068_0001
Figure imgf000068_0002
Table B
Figure imgf000069_0001
Figure imgf000069_0002
Table C
Figure imgf000070_0001
Table D
Figure imgf000071_0001
Figure imgf000071_0002
Table E
Figure imgf000072_0001
R1 = H
Figure imgf000072_0002
Table F
Figure imgf000073_0001
Figure imgf000073_0002
Figure imgf000073_0003
Figure imgf000073_0004
Table G
Figure imgf000074_0001
Table H
Figure imgf000075_0001
Table I
Figure imgf000076_0001
Figure imgf000076_0002
Figure imgf000076_0003
Figure imgf000076_0004
Table J
Figure imgf000077_0001
R1 = H
Figure imgf000077_0002
Table K
Figure imgf000078_0001
Table L
Figure imgf000079_0001
Figure imgf000079_0002
Figure imgf000079_0003
Table M
Figure imgf000080_0001
Table N
Figure imgf000081_0001
Figure imgf000081_0002
Figure imgf000081_0003
Figure imgf000081_0004
Table O
Figure imgf000082_0001
Figure imgf000083_0001
Table Q
Figure imgf000084_0001
Table R
Figure imgf000085_0001
R1 = H
Figure imgf000085_0002
Table S
Figure imgf000086_0001
R1 = H
Figure imgf000086_0002
Table T
Figure imgf000087_0001
R1 = H
Figure imgf000087_0002
Figure imgf000087_0003
Figure imgf000087_0005
Table U
Figure imgf000088_0001
Table V
Figure imgf000089_0001
Table W
Figure imgf000090_0001
R1 = H
Figure imgf000090_0002
Table X
Figure imgf000091_0001
R1 = H
Figure imgf000091_0002
Figure imgf000091_0003
Figure imgf000091_0004
Figure imgf000091_0005
Table Y
Figure imgf000092_0001
R1 = H
Figure imgf000092_0002
Figure imgf000092_0003
Figure imgf000092_0004
Figure imgf000092_0005
Table Z
Figure imgf000093_0001
Table AA
Figure imgf000094_0001
Table AB
Figure imgf000095_0001
R1 = H
Figure imgf000095_0002
Table AC
Figure imgf000096_0001
R1 = H
Figure imgf000096_0002
Figure imgf000096_0003
Figure imgf000096_0004
Figure imgf000096_0005
Table AD
Figure imgf000097_0001
Figure imgf000097_0002
Figure imgf000097_0003
Figure imgf000097_0004
Table AE
Figure imgf000098_0001
Without departing from the spirit and scope of this invention, one of ordinary skill can make various changes and modifications to the invention to adapt it to various usages and conditions. As such, these changes and modifications are properly, equitably, and intended to be, within the full range of equivalence of the following claims.
EXAMPLE 1: MOR agonist activity using GTPγS binding assay
To assess the mu opiate receptor (MOR) agonist activity of positive compounds from the FLNA screening, compounds were tested in a [35S]GTPyS binding assay using striatal membranes. Our previous study has shown that in striatal membranes, activation of MOR leads to an increase in [35S]GTPyS binding to GCCo (Wang et al . , 2005 Neuroscience 135:247-261) .
Striatal tissue was homogenized in 10 volumes of ice cold 25 mM HEPES buffer, pH 7.4, which contained 1 mM EGTA, 100 mM sucrose, 50 μg/ml leupeptin, 0.04 mM PMSF, 2 μg/ml soybean trypsin inhibitor and 0.2% 2-mercaptoethanol . The homogenates were centrifuged at 800 X g for 5 minutes and the supernatants were centrifuged at 49,000 X g for 20 minutes. The resulting pellets were suspended in 10 volume of reaction buffer, which contained 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 100 mM NaCl, 50 μg/ml leupeptin, 2 μg/ml soybean trypsin inhibitor, 0.04 mM PMSF and 0.02% 2-mercaptomethanol .
The resultant striatal membrane preparation (200 μg) was admixed and maintained (incubated) at 3O0C for 5 minutes in reaction buffer as above that additionally contained 1 mM MgCl2 and 0.5 nM [35S]GTPyS (0.1 μCi/assay, PerkinElmer Life and Analytical Sciences) in a total volume of 250 μl and continued for 5 minutes in the absence or presence of 0.1 - 10 μM of an assayed compound of interest. The reaction was terminated by dilution with 750 μl of ice-cold reaction buffer that contained 20 mM MgCl2 and 1 mM EGTA and immediate centrifugation at 16,000 X g for 5 minutes .
The resulting pellet was solubilized by sonicating for 10 seconds in 0.5 ml of immunoprecipitation buffer containing 0.5% digitonin, 0.2% sodium cholate and 0.5% NP-40. Normal rabbit serum (1 μl) was added to 1 ml of lysate and incubated at 250C for 30 minutes. Nonspecific immune complexes were removed by incubation with 25 μl of protein A/G-conjugated agarose beads at 250C for 30 minutes followed by centrifugation at 5,000 X g at 40C for 5 minutes. The supernatant was divided and separately incubated at 25°C for 30 minutes with antibodies raised against GCCo proteins (1:1,000 dilutions) .
The immunocomplexes so formed were collected by incubation at 250C for 30 minutes with 40 μl of agarose-conjugated protein A/G beads and centrifugation at 5,000 X g at 4°C for 5 minutes. The pellet was washed and suspended in buffer containing 50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, and 1% NP-40. The radioactivity in the suspension was determined by liquid scintillation spectrometry. The specificity of MOR activation of [35S]GTPyS binding to GCCo induced by a selective compound was defined by inclusion of 1 μM β-funaltrexamine (β-FNA; an alkylating derivative of naltrexone that is a selective MOR antagonist) . DAMGO (H-Tyr-D-Ala-Gly-N-MePhe-Gly-OH; 1 or 10 μM) was used as a positive control.
The results of this study are shown in the Table below.
FLNA-Binding Compound MOR Agonist Activity
Figure imgf000101_0001
Figure imgf000102_0001
EXAMPLE 2: FITC-NLX-based FLNA Screening Assay
A. Streptavidin-coated 96-well plates Streptavidin-coated 96-well plates (Reacti-
Bind™ NeutrAvidin™ High binding capacity coated 96- well plate, Pierce-ENDOGEN) are washed three times with 200 μl of 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4 according to the manufacturer's recommendation.
B. N-biotinylated VAKGL pentapeptide (Bn- VAKGL) (SEQ ID NO: 1)
Bn-VAKGL peptide (0.5 mg/plate) is dissolved in 50 μl DMSO and then added to 4450 μl of 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4, containing 100 mM NaCl and protease inhibitors (binding medium) as well as 500 μl superblock in PBS (Pierce-ENDOGEN) [final concentration for DMSO: 1%] .
C. Coupling of Bn-VAKGL peptides to streptavidin-coated plate
The washed streptavidin-coated plates are contacted with 5 μg/well of Bn-VAKGL (100 μl) for 1 hour (incubated) with constant shaking at 250C [50 μl of Bn-VAKGL peptide solution from B + 50 μl binding medium, final concentration for DMSO: 0.5%] . At the end of the incubation, the plate is washed three times with 200 μl of ice-cold 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4.
D. Binding of FITC-tagged naloxone [FITC-NLX] to VAKGL. Bn-VAKGL coated streptavidin plates are incubated with 10 nM fluorescein isothiocyanate- labeled naloxone (FITC-NLX; Invitrogen) in binding medium (50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4 containing 100 mM NaCl and protease inhibitors) for 30 minutes at 3O0C with constant shaking. The final assay volume is 100 μl . At the end of incubation, the plate is washed twice with 100 μl of ice-cold 50 mM Tris, pH 7.4. The signal, bound-FITC-NLX is detected using a DTX-880 multi-mode plate reader (Beckman) .
E. Screening of Medicinal Chemistry Analogs The compounds are first individually dissolved in 25% DMSO containing 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4, to a final concentration of 1 mM (assisted by sonication when necessary) and then plated into 96- well compound plates. To screen new compounds, each compound solution (1 μl) is added to the Bn-VAKGL coated streptavidin plate with 50 μl/well of binding medium followed immediately with addition of 50 μl of FITC-NLX (total assay volume/well is 100 μl) . The final screening concentration for each compound is 10 μM.
Each screening plate includes vehicle control (total binding) as well as naloxone (NLX) and/or naltrexone (NTX) as positive controls. Compounds are tested in triplicate or quadruplicate. Percent inhibition of FITC-NLX binding for each compound is calculated [(Total FITC-NLX bound in vehicle - FITC-NLX bound in compound) /Total FITC-NLX bound in vehicle] x 100%] . To assess the efficacies and potencies of the selected compounds, compounds that achieve approximately 60-70% inhibition at 10 μM are screened further at 1 and 0.1 μM concentrations.
The results of this screening assay are shown in the table below.
FLNA Peptide Binding Assay
Figure imgf000104_0001
Figure imgf000105_0001
EXAMPLE 3: Tail-flick test
The mouse "tail flick" test was used to assay the relative antinociceptive activity of compositions containing a compound to be assayed. This assay was substantially that disclosed by Xie et al., 2005 J. Neurosci 25:409-416.
The mouse hot-water tail-flick test was performed by placing the distal third of the tail in a water bath maintained at 520C. The latency until tail withdrawal from the bath was determined and compared among the treatments. A 10 second cutoff was used to avoid tissue damage. Data are converted to percentage of antinociception by the following formula: (response latency - baseline latency) / (cutoff - baseline latency) x 100 to generate dose-response curves. Linear regression analysis of the log dose-response curves was used to calculate the A50 (dose that resulted in a 50% antinociceptive effect) doses and the 95% confidence intervals (CIs) . Relative potency was determined as a ratio of the A50 values. The significance of the relative potency and the confidence intervals are determined by applying the t test at p < 0.05.
To assess tolerance to the antinociceptive effect, the compound was administered twice daily for 7 days at an A90 dose (dose that results in a 90% antinociceptive effect in the 520C warm-water tail- flick test), and the tail-flick test was performed daily after the a.m. dose. A significant reduction in tail-flick latency on subsequent days compared to the Day 1 administration of the A90 dose indicates antinociceptive tolerance. Assays were typically carried out separately using at least 32 and 56 mg/kg dosages, with some assays also separately carried out at 18 and 100 mg/kg.
Orally administered morphine exhibited an A50 value of 61.8 (52.4-72.9) mg/kg, and a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 43% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes. Orally administered compound C0027 exhibited a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 70% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes, whereas orally administered compound C0134M exhibited a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 50% at 56 mg/kg at about 30 minutes, compound C0066 exhibited a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 55% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes, compound C0108M exhibited a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 50% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes, compound C0090 exhibited a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 35% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes, and compound C0089 exhibited a mean maximum antinociception amount of about 30% at 56 mg/kg at about 20 minutes.
EXAMPLE 4: Dependence test
On day 8, 16-20 hours after the last administration of an assay composition, animals were given naloxone to precipitate withdrawal (10 mg/kg, s. c.) before being placed in an observation chamber for 1 hour. A scale adapted from MacRae et al . , 1997 Psychobiology 25:77-82 was used to quantify four categories of withdrawal behaviors: "wet dog" shakes, paw tremors, mouth movements, and ear wipes. Scores are summed to yield a total withdrawal score across the 1-hour test.
EXAMPLE 5: Relative Gs/Go Switching
In this set of studies, the rat brain slice organotypic culture methods were modified from those published previously (Adamchik et al . , 2000 Brain Res Protoc 5:153-158; Stoppini et al . , 1991 J Neurosci Methods 37:173-182) . Striatal slices (200 μM thickness) were prepared using a Mcllwain tissue chopper (Mickle Laboratory Engineering Co., Surrey, UK) . Slices were carefully transferred to sterile, porous culture inserts (0.4 μm, Millicell-CM) using the rear end of a glass Pasteur pipette. Each culture insert unit contained 2 slices and was placed into one well of the 12-well culture tray. Each well contain 1.5 ml of culture medium composed of 50% MEM with Earl's salts, 2 mM L-glutamine, 25% Earl's balanced salt solution, 6.5 g/1 D-glucose, 20% fetal bovine serum, 5% horse serum, 25 mM HEPES buffer, 50 mg/ml streptomycin and 50 mg/ml penicillin. The pH value was adjusted to 7.2 with HEPES buffer.
Cultures were first incubated for 2 days to minimize the impact of injury from slice preparation. Incubator settings throughout the experiment were 360C with 5% CO2. To induce tolerance, culture medium was removed and the culture insert containing the slices was gently rinsed twice with warm (370C) phosphate-buffered saline (pH 7.2) before incubation in 0.1% fetal bovine serum-containing culture medium with 100 μM morphine for 1 hour twice daily (at 9-10 AM and 3-4 PM) for 7 days.
Slices were returned to culture medium with normal serum after each drug exposure. Tissues were harvested 16 hours after the last drug exposure by centrifugation .
For determination of MOR - G protein coupling, slices were homogenated to generate synaptic membranes. Synaptic membranes (400 μg) were incubated with either 10 μM oxycodone or Kreb's- Ringer solution for 10 minutes before solubilization in 250 μl of immunoprecipitation buffer (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.5; 200 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA, 50 μg/ml leupeptin, 10 μg/ml aprotinin, 2 μg/ml soybean trypsin inhibitor, 0.04 mM PMSF and mixture of protein phosphatase inhibitors) . Following centrifugation, striatal membrane lysates were immunoprecipitated with immobilized anti-Gαs/olf or -Gαo conjugated with immobilized protein G-agarose beads. The level of MOR in anti-Gαs/olf or -Gαo immunoprecipitates was determined by Western blotting using specific anti- MOR antibodies.
To measure the magnitude of MOR-mediated inhibition of cAMP production, brain slices were incubated with Kreb' s-Ringer (basal), 1 μM DAMGO, 1 μM forskolin or 1 μM DAMGO + 1 μM forskolin for 10 minutes at 370C in the presence of 100 μM of the phosphodiesterase inhibitor IBMX. Tissues were homogenized by sonication and protein precipitated with IM TCA. The supernatant obtained after centrifugation was neutralized using 50 mM Tris, pH 9.0. The level of cAMP in the brain lysate was measured by a cAMP assay kit (PerkinElmer Life Science, Boston) according to manufacturer's instructions .
Figure imgf000109_0001
Figure imgf000110_0001
EXAMPLE 6: Carrageenan-Induced
Acute Inflammatory Pain
To test the antinociceptive activity of the compounds under acute inflammatory conditions, the latency to paw withdrawal from a noxious thermal stimulus is determined before and 3 hours after injection of a 50 μl solution of 2% carrageenan into the plantar surface of the hindpaw (Mogil et al . 1999 Pain 80:67-82) . Animals are placed in plexiglas boxes on top of a glass plate maintained at 3O0C and allowed to habituate for two sessions (-24 hours and -1 hour) . Each habituation session lasts approximately 45-60 minutes.
For baseline paw withdrawal latencies, an infrared heat source (Ugo Basile model 37370) is applied from under the glass plate onto the plantar surface of the right hind paw with the focus of the light beam no larger than a 3- to 5-mm diameter. The time to withdrawal of the hind paw from the heat source is recorded. A maximum cutoff of 30 seconds is used to prevent tissue damage. The intensity of the beam is set so that baseline latencies are approximately 15 seconds. The post-carrageenan baseline is reestablished 3 hours after the carrageenan injections and only animals with a significant decrease in the latency of hind paw withdrawal from the thermal stimulus (thermal hypersensitivity) are tested. Animals are administered compounds, and hind paw withdrawal latencies are tested at various intervals after injection until the drug response falls below -20% MPE.
Antihyperalgesia (thermal hypersensitivity) and antinociception are calculated as follows: percentage activity = 100 [ (test paw withdrawal latency - post-carrageenan baseline paw withdrawal latency) / (pre-carrageenan baseline paw withdrawal latency - post-carrageenan baseline paw withdrawal latency) ] .
Paw edema is determined by use of a plethysmometer (Ugo Basile) in the mice undergoing the thermal latency testing. Paw volumes for the left and right hind paw are measured at the conclusion of the thermal latency testing (120 minutes after drug administration) .
Compound Syntheses
A compound useful herein can be readily synthesized. An illustrative synthetic scheme is shown below that preparation of compounds containing two sulfonyl linkages and one sulfonyl and one carbonyl linkage. That scheme can be readily adapted for the preparation of compounds containing two carbonyl linkages and one carbonyl and one sulfonyl linkage in the opposite configurations from those shown. More detailed syntheses are set out hereinafter . General Reaction Scheme
Figure imgf000112_0001
Preparation of compound 3-3
Figure imgf000112_0002
a. Preparation of compound 3-2
4-Methylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (1.04 g, 5.49 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 3-1 (0.8 g, 5.23 mmol) in pyridine (20 mL) in an atmosphere of N2 and the mixture was allowed to react overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. Water was added and the resulting reaction mixture was extracted with CH2Cl2 3 times. The combined organic layers were washed with 3M HCl and brine and concentrated to give compound 3-2 (0.78 g, yield: 59%, NMR confirmed) .
b. Preparation of compound 3-3
A solution of compound 3-2 (250 mg, 0.99 mmol), p-tolunesulfonic acid monohydrate (20 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (5 mL) in ethanol (20 mL) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer was washed with water and brine, dried with Na2SO4 and concentrated to give compound 3-3 (230 mg, yield: 80%, NMR confirmed) as a white solid.
Preparation of compound 3-5
Figure imgf000113_0001
a. Preparation of compound 3-4
To a solution of piperidin-4-one (0.47 g, 3.08 mmol) in pyridine (20 mL) was added 4-acetylaminobenzene sulfonyl chloride (0.6 g, 2.57 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. Then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. To the residue was added CH2Cl2 (100 mL) and 2N HCl (50 mL) . The organic layer was separated and washed with 2N HCl (30 mL x 2), then dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the title compound as yellow solid. (0.4g, yield: 52.6%) .
b. Preparation of compound 3-5
To a solution of compound 3-4 (0.55 g, 1.86 mmol) in ethanol (50 mL) was added p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (50 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (0.5 g, 8.2 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at 260C. Then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. To the residue was added CH2Cl2 (100 mL) and saturated Na2CO3 (100 mL) . The organic layer was separated and washed with saturated Na2CO3 (50 mL x 3), then dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the crude product as white powder. (0.59 g, yield: 92.1%) .
Preparation of compound 3-7
Figure imgf000114_0001
a. Preparation of compound 3-6
To a solution of compound 1 (150 mg, 1.11 mmol) in pyridine (4 mL) was treated with 4-phenylnezenesulfonyl chloride (279.2 mg, 1.11 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . To the solution was added water and then extracted with dichloromethane (3 times) . The combined organic phase was washed with 3M HCl and concentrated to give 205 mg of desired product as solid (1H NMR confirmed , 58.6% yield) .
b. Preparation of compound 3-7
To a solution of compound 3-6 (205 mg, 0.65 mmol) in ethanol (EtOH) (6 mL) was treated with p- toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (20 mg) and HOCH2CH2NH2 (2 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Then EtOH was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was partitioned between dichloromethane and water. The organic phase was washed by saturated aqueous NaHCU3 and brine. Then organic layer was concentrated to give 202 mg of crude as white liquid (yield 87%) .
Preparation of compound 3-11
Figure imgf000115_0001
a. Preparation of compound 3-10
4-Isopropylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (0.13 mL, 0.7375 mmol) was added to a solution of piperidin-4-one hydrochloride hydrate (100 mg, 0.7375 mmol) in pyridine (3 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. Water was added and the resulting reaction mixture was extracted with CH2Cl2 3 times. The combined organic layers were washed with 3M HCl and concentrated to give compound 3-10 (105 mg, yield: 50.7%, NMR confirmed) as a white solid.
b. Preparation of compound 3-11
To a solution of compound 3-10 (200 mg, 0.71 mmol) in ethanol (EtOH) (6 mL) was added p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (15 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (1.5 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. EtOH was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between CH2Cl2 and water. The organic phase was washed with saturated aqueous NaHCU3 and brine and concentrated to give compound 3-11 (231 mg, yield: 100%) as a white foam.
Preparation of compound 3-13
Figure imgf000116_0001
a. Preparation of compound 3-12
A solution of compound 1 (300 mg, 2.21 mmol) in pyridine (8 mL) was admixed with 4-methoxy- sulfonylbenzene-1-sulfonyl chloride (0.34 mL, 2.21 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. To the solution was added water and that composition was extracted with dichloromethane 3 times. The combined organic phase was washed with 3 M HCl and concentrated to give 335 mg of white solid (1H NMR confirmed, 56% yield) .
a. Preparation of compound 3-12
A solution of compound 3-12 (335 mg, 1.244 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) was treated with p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (25 mg) and HOCH2CH2NH2 (2 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The ethanol was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was partitioned between dichloromethane and water. The organic phase was washed by saturated NaHCθ3 and brine then concentrated to provide 380 mg of colorless oil (yield 97.7%) .
b. Preparation of compound 3-13
To a solution of compound 3-12 (335 mg, 1.244 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) was added p-toluene- sulfonic acid monohydrate (25 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (2 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. Ethanol was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between CH2Cl2 and water. The organic phase was washed with saturated NaHCC>3 and brine and concentrated to give compound 3-13 (380 mg, yield: 97.7%) as a colorless oil.
Preparation of compound 3-15
Figure imgf000118_0001
a. Preparation of compound 3-14
To a solution of compound 3-1 (100 mg, 0.7375 mmol) in pyridine (3 mL) was added 4-trifluoromethoxy-benzene-1-sulfonyl chloride (192.38 mg, 0.7375 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. Water was added and the resulting reaction mixture was extracted with CH2CI2 3 times. The combined organic layers were washed with 3M HCl and concentrated to give compound 3-14 (111 mg, yield: 46.6%, 1H-NMR confirmed) as a white solid.
b. Preparation of compound 3-15 p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (10 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (1 mL) were added to a solution of compound 3-14 (111 mg, 0.343 mmol) in ethanol (EtOH) (4 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. EtOH was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between CH2Cl2 and water. The organic layer was washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and brine and concentrated to give compound 3-15 (128 mg of crude compound, NMR confirmed) as a light yellow liquid.
Figure imgf000119_0001
a. Preparation of compound 3-16
2-Methyl-benzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (140.6 mg, 0.7375 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 3—1 (100 mg, 0.7375 mmol) in pyridine (3 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. Water was added and the resulting reaction mixture was extracted with CH2CI2 3 times. The combined organic layers were washed with 3M HCl and concentrated to give compound 3-16 (104 mg, yield: 56%, 1H NMR confirmed) as a white solid.
b. Preparation of compound 3-17
To a solution of compound 3-16 (104 mg, 0.41 mmol) in ethanol (EtOH) (4 mL) was added p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (10 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (1 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. EtOH was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was partitioned between CH2Cl2 and water. The organic phase was washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and brine and concentrated to give the crude compound 3-17 (120 mg, yield: 100%) as a light yellow liquid. Preparation of compound 3-25
Figure imgf000120_0001
a. Preparation of compound 3-24
2-Cyanobenzenesulfonyl chloride (100 mg, 0.50 mmol) was added to a solution of piperidin-4-one (92 mg, 0.60 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Pyridine was removed by reduced pressure evaporation. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (50 mL) , and water (30 mL) was added. The CH2Cl2 layer was separated and the water phase was extracted with CH2Cl2 (2 x 20 mL) . The organic layers were combined and washed with 3M HCl (20 mL x 2 ) . The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the title product as light-yellow oil (70 mg, yield: 53.4%, confirmed by MS) .
b. Preparation of compound 3-25
To a solution of compound 3-24 (35 mg, 0.13 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) was added 2-aminoethanol (0.5 mL) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (5 mg) . The mixture was stirred at 3O0C overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed by evaporation under vacuum. To the residue was added CH2Cl2 (30 mL) , then the CH2Cl2 layer was washed with saturated Na2Cθ3 (15 mL x 2) and water (20 mL x 3), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the crude product as yellow oil (33 mg, yield: 80.5%, 1H-NMR confirmed) . Preparation of compound 3-29
Figure imgf000121_0001
a. Preparation of compound 3-28
3-Trifluoro-methoxybenzenesulfonyl chloride (287 mg, 1.1 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 1 (150 mg, 1.1 mmol) in pyridine (7 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Water was added to the solution and then the solution was extracted with dichloromethane (3 times) . The combined organic phase was washed with 3 M HCl and concentrated to give 150 mg of the desired product as light yellow solid (1H NMR confirmed , 42% yield) .
b. Preparation of compound 3-29
A solution of compound 3-28 (140 mg, 0.46 mmol) in ethanol (EtOH) (6 mL) was treated with p-toluenesulfonic acid (15 mg) and HOCH2CH2NH2 (1.5 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The EtOH was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was partitioned between dichloromethane and water. The organic phase was washed by saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was concentrated to give 145 mg of compound 3-29 as white liquid (1H-NMR confirmed, yield 85%) . Preparation of compound 3-31
Figure imgf000122_0001
3-30 3-31 a. Preparation of compound 3-30
Benzenesulfonyl chloride (200 mg, 1.13 mmol) was added to a solution of piperidin-4-one (208 mg, 1.36 mmol) in 20 mL of pyridine was added benzenesulfonyl chloride (200 mg, 1.13 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The pyridine was then removed by evaporation under vacuum. To the residue was added CH2Cl2 (50 mL) , then the CH2Cl2 layer was washed with 3M HCl (30 mL x 3), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the crude product as a light yellow solid (138 mg, yield:51%) .
b. Preparation of compound 3-31
A solution of compound 3-30 (136 mg, 0.57 mmol), p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (15 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (2 mL) in ethanol (EtOH) (20 mL) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed by evaporation under vacuum. To the residue was added ethyl acetate (50 mL) and water (50 mL) . The ethyl acetate layer was washed with water (30 mL x 3) . The water phase was washed with ethyl acetate (20 mL) . The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated to give the crude product (151 mg, yield: 92.5%) . The crude product was directly used in the next step.
Preparation of compound 3-33
Figure imgf000123_0001
a. Preparation of compound 3-32
3-Methyl-benzenesulfonyl chloride was added to a solution of piperidin-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (159 mg, 1.03 mmol) in 10 mL pyridine (130 mg, 0.69 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The pyridine was removed by evaporation under vacuum. To the residue was added CH2CI2 (50 mL) , the CH2CI2 layer was washed with 3 M HCl (30 mL x 3), dried over Na2SC>4 and concentrated to give the crude product as light yellow solid (140 mg, yield: 80.5%) .
b. Preparation of compound 3-33
A solution of compound 3-32 (140 mg, 0.55 mmol), p-toluenesulfonic acid (15 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (2 mL) in ethanol (20 mL) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed by evaporation under vacuum. To the residue was added ethyl acetate (50 mL) and water (50 mL) . The ethyl acetate layer was washed with water (30 mL x 3), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the crude product as a yellow oil (170 mg) . Preparation of compounds 3-35
Figure imgf000124_0001
a. Preparation of compound 3-34
4-Methoxybenzoyl chloride (0.5 g, 2.93 mmol) was added to a solution of piperidin-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate ( 0.30 g, 1.95 mmol) in pyridine (20 mL) . The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The reaction solvent was then removed under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (50 mL), then washed with 3M HCl (50 mL x 3 ) . The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to give the title compound as a brown oil (330 mg, yield: 61.5%, LC-MS confirmed) .
b. Preparation of compound 3-35
A solution of compound 3-34 (330 mg, 1.42 mmol), 2-aminoethanol (2 mL) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (33 mg) in ethanol (20 mL) was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was then removed by evaporation under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (50 mL) , then washed with water (50 mL x 3 ) . The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to give the crude product as a yellow oil (360 mg, yield: 92.1%, 1H-NMR and MS confirmed) . Preparation of compound 3-37
Figure imgf000125_0001
a. Preparation of compound 3-36
A solution of piperidine-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (178 mg, 1.16 mmol) in pyridine (20 ml) was treated with 4-methoxy- benzenesulfonyl chloride (200 mg, 0.97 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The pyridine was then removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (50 mL), then washed with 3M HCl (30 mL x 3 ) . The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4 and concentrated to give the product as a yellow solid (260 mg, yield: 100%, LC-MS confirmed) .
b. Preparation of compound 3-37
A solution of compound 3-36 (130 mg, 0.48 mmol), 2-aminoethanol (2 mL) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (13 mg) in ethanol (20 mL) was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (50 mL), then washed with saturated Na2CC>3 (50 mL x 2) and water (50 mL x 2 ) . The organic layer was then dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the product as a white colloid (118 mg, yield: 78.1%, LC-MS confirmed) Preparation of compound 3-38
Figure imgf000126_0001
N-benzyl-4-piperidone 3.33 p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (0.1 g) and 2-aminoethanol (2.45 g, 40.2 mmol) were added to a solution of N-benzyl-4-piperidone (3.8 g, 20.1 mmol) in ethanol (30 mL) . The mixture was stirred at 3O0C overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. To the residue was added CH2Cl2 (100 mL) and saturated Na2CO3 (60 mL) . The CH2Cl2 layer was separated and washed with saturated Na2CO3 (50 mL x 4) . The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the crude product as a brown oil (3 g, yield: 63.8%, 1H NMR confirmed) .
Preparation of compound 3-40
Figure imgf000126_0002
3-38 3-39 3-40 a. Preparation of compound 3-39
To a solution of compound 3-38 (382 mg, 1.65 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) was added p-acetyl- benzenesulfonyl chloride (300 mg, 1.37 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. To the residue was added CH2Cl2 (50 mL) , then the solution was washed with saturated Na2Cθ3 aqueous (30 mL x 3), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the crude product as brown oil.
b. Preparation of compound 3-40
To a solution of compound 3-39 (1.33 g, 3.2 mmol) in CH2OH/CH2C12 (40/20 mL) was added 10%Pd/C
(270 mg) . The mixture was stirred under H2 at room temperature for 24 hours. Thin-layer chromatography
(TLC) indicated that no reaction had taken place. Then the Pd/C was replaced with Pd(OH)2/C, and the reaction was stirred under H2 at room temperature and atmosphere pressure overnight (about 18 hours) . TLC indicated that the reaction completed. The reaction mixture was filtrated and evaporated to give the crude product as light yellow solid (0.98 g, yield: 93.6%, LC-MS confirmed) .
Preparation of compound 3-44
Figure imgf000127_0001
a. Preparation of compound 3-43 To a solution of piperidine-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (0.52 g, 3.38 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) , p-nitro-benzenesulfonyl chloride (0.5 g, 2.26 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at 3O0C and the solvent was removed under the reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (30 mL) , washed with 3N HCl (15 mL x 3), the organic layer was dried, and evaporated to give the crude compound as light yellow solid (200 mg, yield: 31%, LC-MS confirmed) .
b. Preparation of compound 3-44
To a solution compound 3-43 (0.58 g, 2.04 mmol) in 20 mL of ethanol was added 2-aminoethanol (2 mL) and 4-methylbenzenesulfonic acid monohydrate (60 mg) . The mixture was stirred at 250C overnight
(about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2
(100 mL), washed with saturated Na2CO3 (100 mL x 3) and saturated NaHCO3 (50 mL x 3 ) . The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the title compound as yellow solid (0.58 g, yield: 90.6%)
Preparation of compound C0008-2
Figure imgf000128_0001
C0008-1 C0008-2 a. Preparation of compound C0008-1
To a solution of piperidin-4-one hydrochloride hydrate (343 mg, 2.23 mmol) in pyridine (6 mL) was added 4-cyanobenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (400 mg, 1.98 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (50 mL) and washed with 1 N HCl (50 mL x 3) . The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, and concentrated to give the crude product as white solid (168 mg; yield: 50%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0008-2
To the solution of compound C0008-1 (268 mg, 1.015 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) was added 2-aminoethanol (1.23 mL) and toluene-4-sulfonic acid monohydrate (6 mg, 0.03 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (50 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (50 mLχ6) . The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to give compound C0008-2 as yellow oil (295 mg; yield: 94.7%) .
Preparation of compound C0009-2
Figure imgf000129_0001
C0009-1 C0009-2 a. Preparation of compound C0009-1
4- (Methylsulfonyl) benzene-1-sulfonyl chloride (410 mg, 1.6 mmol) was added to a solution of piperidin-4-one hydrochloride hydrate (247 mg, 1.6 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. To the residue was added CH2CI2 (50 mL) , then the solution was washed with IN HCl (20 mL x 3), dried over Na2SC>4 and concentrated to give the title product 225 mg as yellow solid (yield: 44%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0009-2 p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (4 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (0.8 mL, 13.3 mmol) were added to a solution of compound C0009-1 (225 mg, 0.7 mmol) in ethanol (6 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. To the residue was added CH2CI2 (70 mL) and washed with saturated NaHCO3 (25 mLχ4), then dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the product 205 mg as white solid (yield: 81%) .
Preparation of compound COOll-3
Figure imgf000130_0001
C0011-1 COO1 1 _2 C0011-3
a. Preparation of compound COOll-1 To a solution of N-BOC-piperidin-4-one (5 g, 23.2 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (100 mg) in 50 mL of ethanol was added 2-aminoethanol (6 mL) . The mixture was stirred at 25°C overnight
(about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was separated between 100 mL of dichloromethane and 100 mL of saturated Na2CC>3, the organic layer was separated and washed with water (100 mL x 3 ) . Then the organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the crude product as yellow oil (5.9 g, yield: 100%) . 1H NMR indicated that the crude product was a mixture containing the title product, which was used directly in the next step without further purification .
b. Preparation of compound COOll-2
4-Acetylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (3 g, 13.7 mmol) was added to a solution of compound COOll-1 (5.3 g, 20.6 mmol) in 40 mL of pyridine. The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight
(about 18 hours) . Then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2
(100 mL) and saturated Na2CO3 (100 mL) , the organic layer was separated and washed with saturated Na2CO3
(100 mL x 3), and concentrated to give the yellow oil, which was purified with silica gel column to give the pure title compound (0.3 g, yield: 3.4%, 1H NMR and LC-MS confirmed)
c. Preparation of compound COOll-3
To a solution of compound COOll-2 (0.3 g, 0.71 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (2 mL) . The mixture was stirred for 1 hour at room temperature. CH2Cl2 (20 mL) was added, and saturated Na2CO3 (30 mL) was added slowly with an ice- bath. The organic phase was separated, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and then concentrated to give the crude product as yellow oil (160 mg, yield: 42%, LC- MS confirmed) .
Preparation of compound C0025-2
Figure imgf000132_0001
C0025-1 C0025-2 a . Preparation of compound C0025-1
To a solution of piperidin-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate ( 1.8 g, 11.74 mmol) in pyridine (30 mL) was added 4-bromobenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (2 g, 7.83 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (100 mL) , washed with 3N HCl (100 mL x 2), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the title compound as a pale solid (1.3 g, yield: 52%, TLC confirmed) .
b. Preparation of compound C0025-2
A solution of C0025-1 (1.3 g, 4.09 mmol), 2-aminoethanol (5 mL) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (130 mg) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at 25°C in 60 mL ethanol. The solvent was removed by reduced pressure evaporation. The residue was diluted with 200 mL dichloromethane, washed with water (100 mL x 3 ) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solutions (100 mL x 3 ) . Next, the organic layer was dried and concentrated to get the product as a white solid. (1.44 g, yield: 97%, TLC confirmed) .
Preparation of compound C0026
Figure imgf000133_0001
Prepared using procedures illustrated elsewhere herein.
Preparation of compound C0027
Figure imgf000133_0002
a. Preparation of compound 3-38 p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (100 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (5 mL) were added to a solution of N-benzyl-piperidin-4-one (10 g 52.8 mmol) in 80 mL of ethanol. The mixture was stirred at 25 °C overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure, the residue was diluted with 50 mL dichloromethane, and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate solutions (30 mL x 3), saturated sodium carbonate (30 mL X 3 ) . The organic layer was dried and concentrated to get the product as yellow oil (11.5 g, yield: 93.8) .
b. Preparation of compound C0027-1
4-Methoxybenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride was added to the solution of compound 3-38 (1.37 g, 5.91 mmol) in pyridine (20 mL) (1.83 g, 8.85 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue (brown oil) was purified with silica gel column to give yellow foam (410 mg, yield: 17%, confirmed by LC-MS) .
c. Preparation of compound C0027
To the solution of C0027-1 (410 mg, 1.02 mmol) in MeOH:CH2Cl2 =2:1 (30 mL), 10% Pd/C (0.2 g) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) under H2. The solvent was filtered to remove Pd/C. The solvent was removed under the reduced pressure to give the white foam as product (310 mg, yield: 98%, confirmed by LCMS) .
1H NMR (400MHz, DMSO-d6) δ:7.79 (d, J = 9.2Hz, 2H), 7.15 (d, J = 8.4Hz, 2H), 3.96 (t, J = 6.4Hz, 2H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.47 (t, J = 6.4Hz ,2H), 3.28-3.24 (m, 2H), 2.86 (t, J = 12Hz, 2H), 2.46 (dt, J = 13.6Hz, 2H), 1.74 (d, J = 12.8Hz, 2H); MS (ESI) calcd for Ci4H20N2O4S (m/z ) : 312.11 ; found: 313.0 [M+l]+ Preparation of compound C0029-2
Figure imgf000135_0001
C0029-1 C0029-2
a. Preparation of compound C0029-1
4-Flurobenzene-sulfonyl chloride (1 g, 5.14 mmol) was added to a solution of piperidine-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (1.47 g, 9.57 mmol) in pyridine (20 mL) . The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Next, the solvent was removed under the reduced pressure and the residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (20 mL) and washed with 3 N HCl (15 mL x 3) . The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered, and evaporated to give the crude compound as white solid (0.72 g, yield: 54.5%, 1H-NMR confirmed) .
b. Preparation of compound C0029-2
A solution of compound C0029-1 (0.72 g, 2.8 mmol), 2-aminoethanol (0.26 g, 4.2 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (100 mg) in ethanol (20 mL) was stirred at 250C overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under the reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (20 mL) and washed with NaHCO3 solution (20 mL x 3 ) . The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered, and evaporated to give the crude compound as white solid (0.81 g, yield: 96%, 1H NMR confirmed) . H-NMR (400MHz, CDCl3) δ: 7.81-7.75 (m, 2H) , 7.20~7.14 (m, 2H) , 3.67 (t, J = 6.4Hz, 2H) , 3.31-3.26 (m, 2H) , 3.12 (t, J = 6.4Hz, 2H) , 2.97-2.94 (m, 2H) , 1.76-1.74 (m, 4H) .
Preparation of compound C0030
Figure imgf000136_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0030-1
To a solution of piperdin-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (594 mg, 3.9 mmol) in 20 mL of pyridine was added 4-n-butylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (600 mg, 2.6 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was then diluted with 50 mL of dichloromethane, washed with IN hydrochloric acid (30 mL x 3) . Next, the organic layer was dried and concentrated to give the crude product as a white solid (501 mg, yield: 66%, 1H NMR confirmed) .
b. Preparation of compound C0030-2
A solution of C0030-1 (500 mg, 1.7 mmol), 2-aminoethanol (5 mL) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (100 mg) in 30 mL of ethanol was stirred at 25 °C overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed by reduced pressure evaporation. The residue was diluted with 50 mL dichloromethane, washed with water (50 mL x 3) and saturated sodium bicarbonate aqueous (50 mL x 3 ) . The organic layer was dried and concentrated to give the product as a yellow solid (200 mg, yield: 89%, 1H NMR confirmed) .
Preparation of compound C0032-2
Figure imgf000137_0001
C0032-1 C0032-2 a . Preparation of compound C0032-1
To a solution of piperidine-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (3.15 g, 20.51 mmol) in pyridine (30 mL) , p-nitrobenzoyl chloride (2 g, 10.87 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2CI2 (30 mL) and washed with 3N HCl (20 mL x 3 ) . The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered, and evaporated to give the crude compound as a yellow solid (1.49 g, yield: 55.9%, confirmed by 1H-NMR and LCMS) .
b. Preparation of compound C0032-2
A solution of compound C0032-1 (2 g, 8.06 mmol), 2-aminoethanol (0.73 g) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (200 mg) in ethanol (40 mL) was stirred at 25°C overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (30 mL) and washed with NaHCC>3 (30 mL x 3) . Next, the organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered, and evaporated to give the crude compound as an orange solid. (2.2 g, yield: 93.7%, confirmed by 1H-NMR and LCMS) .
Preparation of compound C0034-3
Figure imgf000138_0001
C0034-1 C0034-2 C0034-3
a. Preparation of compound C0034-1
Cupric chloride (5 g) was added to a saturated solution of sulfur dioxide in CH3COOH (200 mL) and sulfur dioxide gas (from the reaction of NaHSO4 and H2SO4) . The gas was slowly bubbled into the solution for 4 hours until the solution became blue-green. Next, 4-amino-benzene-l-sulfonamide (20 g, 116 mmol) was added to a solution of concentrated HCl (40 mL) and H2O (50 mL) with stirring for 1 hour at 0°C. To this mixture was added a solution of sodium nitrate (8 g, 116 mmol) at such a rate of addition that the temperature did not rise above 0°C. The mixture was stirred for 0.5 hours then quenched with the SO2/CuCl2 solution made earlier. The mixture was then stirred for 1 hour at room temperature. Next, H2O (500 mL) was added, and stirring continued for an additional 30 minutes. The product was collected by suction filtration, washed with H2O, dried in vacuo at 60 °C to give the title product as a light yellow solid (LC-MS confirmed) . After drying, about 10 g crude product as a light yellow solid was obtained (10 g, yield: 33%, confirmed by LC-MS) .
b. Preparation of compound C0034-2 Compound C0034-l(2.00 g, 7.8 mmol) was added to a solution of piperidine-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (1.4 g, 9.4 mmol) in 30 mL pyridine. The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was diluted with CH2Cl2. The crude product was washed with 2N HCl (50 mL x 3) . The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2Cl2. The organic phase was combined and concentrated to give the crude product as a light yellow solid (0.65g, yield: 37%, TLC confirmed) .
c. Preparation of C0034-3
To a solution of compound C0034-2 (0.5 g, 1.58 mmol) in 10 mL ethanol was added ethanolamine (5 mL) and 4-methylbenzenesulfonic acid monohydrate (0.1 g) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at 25°C. Then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (100 mL) , and washed with saturated NaHCO3 (50 mL x 6), there was much dissolved solid. Then the organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to give few yellow solid. The aqueous layer was filtered to provide a white solid. The white solid was confirmed to be the product, which was purified with silica gel column to give the pure product as white solid (0.25 g, yield: 43.9%, 1H NMR confirmed) . Preparation of compound C0037-2
Figure imgf000140_0001
C0040-1 C0037-2 a . Preparation of compound C0040-1
To the solution of piperidin-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (200 mg, 1.3 mmol) in pyridine (20 mL) was added 4-nitrobenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (262 mg, 1.18 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with 50 mL dichloromethane and washed with 0.5 M HCl (50 mL x 3) . The organic layer was dried and evaporated to give the product as white solid. (180 mg, yield: 41.2%, confirmed by 1H-NMR.
b. Preparation of compound C0037-2
3-Aminopropanol (0.5 mL, 6.54 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (30 mg) were added to the solution of compound C0040-1 (200 mg, 0.7 mmol) in 8 mL ethanol. The mixture was stirred at 25°C overnight (about 18 hours) . Then the solvent was removed by evaporation under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2CI2 (20 mL) , washed with saturated Na2CO3 (20 mL x 3) and saturated NaHCO3 (20 mL x 3) . Then the organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the title compound as yellow solid (0.21g; yield: 90.4%; LC-MS& 1H NMR confirmed, HPLC 96.7%) . Preparation of compound C0040
Figure imgf000141_0001
Prepared using procedures illustrated elsewhere herein.
Preparation of compound C0044
Figure imgf000141_0002
C0040-1 C0044
a. Preparation of compound C0040-1
To the solution of piperidin-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (200 mg, 1.3 mmol) in pyridine (2OmL) was added 4-nitrobenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (262 mg, 1.18 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with 50 mL dichloromethane and washed with 0.5 M HCl (50 mL x 3) . The organic layer was dried and evaporated to give the product as white solid. (180 mg, yield: 41.2%, confirmed by 1H-NMR) . b. Preparation of compound C0044
To the solution of C0040-1 (170 mg, 0.5 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (1.7 mg) in ethanol (10 mL) was added cysteamine (46 mg, 0.6 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at 250C The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with dichloromethane (50 mL) and washed with saturated Na2CC>3 solution (40 mL x 3) . The organic layer was dried and evaporated to give the crude product as yellow solid. The solid was washed with IM HCl. The mixture was filtered to get the filtration as white solid. The solid was washed with saturated Na2CC>3 solution and extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried and evaporated to give the product as white solid. (120 mg, yield: 57.9%, confirmed by LCMS) .
Preparation of compound C0046
Figure imgf000142_0001
C0011-1 C0046-1 C0046
a. Preparation of compound C0046-1
4-Acetylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (2 g, 9.1 mmol) was added to a solution of COOll-1 (2.63 g, 10.9 mmol) in pyridine (20 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (100 mL) and washed with saturated NaHCC>3 (100 mL x 3) . The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the crude product as yellow solid, which was purified with silica gel column (eluted with CH2Cl2 : CH3OH=80 : 1 ) to give the title compound as a white solid (3.3 g, yield: 71.7%, 1H NMR confirmed) .
b. Preparation of compound C0046
To the solution of C0046-1 (3.26 g, 11.48 mmol) in dichloromethane (DCM) (20 mL) was add CF3COOH (5 mL) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. Thin-layer chromatography indicated that the material reacted completely. DCM (30 mL) was added and the organic layer was washed with saturated sodium carbonate solution (50 mL x 3) . Then the organic layer was dried and evaporated to get yellow oil, which was purified with silica gel column to give the product as yellow oil (1.1 g, yield: 44%, confirmed by LCMS, MS and 1H NMR, HPLC: 98.2%) .
Preparation of compound C0049-2
Figure imgf000143_0001
C0049-1 C0049-2
a. Preparation of compound C0049-1 3, 4-Dimethoxy-benzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (500 mg, 2.1 mmol) was added to a solution of piperdin-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (486 mg, 3.2 mmol) in 20 mL pyridine. The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. Then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with dichloromethane (50 mL) and washed with 1 N HCl (30 mL x 3 ) . The organic layer was dried and concentrated to give the product as yellow solid (260 mg, yield: 41.2%, confirmed by LCMS) .
b. Preparation of compound C0049-2 p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (26 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (5 mL) were added to a solution of compound C0049-1 (260 mg, 0.87 mmol) in 10 mL of ethanol and stirred at 250C overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed by reduced pressure evaporation. The residue was diluted with 50 mL of dichloromethane, and then washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate solutions (2OmL x 3) . The organic layer was dried and concentrated to give the product as yellow solid (297 mg, yield: 100%, confirmed by 1H NMR) .
Preparation of compound C0050
Figure imgf000144_0001
C0040-1 C0044 C0050 a. Preparation of compound C0040-1
To a solution of piperidin-4-one (200 mg, 1.2 mmol) in pyridine (20 mL) was added 4-nitrobenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (262 mg, 1.18 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with 50 mL dichloromethane and washed with 0.5 M HCl (50 mL x 3) . The organic layer was dried and evaporated to give the product as white solid. (180 mg, yield: 41.2%, confirmed by 1H NMR) .
b. Preparation of compound C0044
To a solution of 4-nitrobenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (170 mg, 0.6 mmol) in 20 mL ethanol was added 2-mercaptoethylamine (70 mg, 0.9 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid (1.7 mg) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at 25° C. The solvent was removed and the residue was diluted with 50 mL dichloromethane, washed with saturated Na2CC>3 solutions (30 mL x 3) . The organic layer was separated, dried, and concentrated to give the crude product as yellow solid, which was purified with silica gel column to give the title product as white solid (100 mg, yield: 48.7%)
c. Preparation of compound C0050
To the solution of C0044 (120 mg, 0.35 mmol) and triethylamine (106 mg, 1.05 mmol) in dry dichloromethane (DCM) (20 mL) was added dropwise acetyl chloride (55 mg, 0.7 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The mixture was washed with water, purified by silica gel column chromatography and then purified by preparative thin-layer chromatography to give a white solid, but HPLC showed it was not pure enough. The partially purified product was further purified by silica gel column chromatography (ethyl acetate: petroleum ether = 3:1 ) to give the pure product as white solid (13mg, yield: 9.7%, confirmed by LCMS, 1H-NMR and MS, HPLC: 97.3%) .
Preparation of compound C0053-3
Figure imgf000146_0001
C0053-1 C0053-2 C0053-3
a. Preparation of compound C0053-1
To a solution of 4-acetylbenzoic acid (250 mg, 1.52 mmol) in dry dichloromethane (20 mL) and dimethylformamide (0.1 mL) was added dropwise oxalyl chloride (570 mg, 4.5 mmol) at 00C. After addition, the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at room temperature. The solvent and excess oxalyl chloride was removed by reduced pressure evaporation to give the product as a yellow solid (270 mg, yield: 97%, confirmed by LCMS dissolved with methanol.
b. Preparation of compound C0053-2
To a solution of COOll-1 (727 mg, 23 mmol) and diisopropyl ethyl amine (1 mL) in dry dichloromethane (DCM) (20 mL) was added C0053-1 (500 mg, 2.74 mmol solution in 20 mL dry DCM) dropwise at 00C. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 days. The mixture was then washed three times with water (50 mL) , the organic layer was dried then evaporated to get the product as brown oil (1.28 g, yield: 100%, confirmed by LCMS) .
c. Preparation compound C0053-3
A solution of C0053-2 (1 g, 2.58 mmol) and CF3COOH (5 mL) in dichloromethane (20 mL) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The mixture was washed with a saturated Na2CU3 solution, the organic layer was dried and evaporated to give the crude product as a brown oil. The crude product was purified on a silica gel column chromatography to provide the purified product as a brown oil (360 mg, yield: 48.3%, confirmed by LCMS.)
Preparation of compound C0055
Figure imgf000147_0001
C0011-1 C0055-1 C0055-2
Figure imgf000147_0002
a. Preparation of compound C0055-1 To compound COOll-1 (I g, 4.13 mmol) in dichloromethane (15 mL) was added triethylamine (1.72 mL, 12.39 mmol) and CBz-Cl (0.88 mL, 6.19 mmol) in a salt-ice bath. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with dichloromethane (30 mL) , and washed with water (20 mL x 2) . The organic layer was dried and evaporated to give the crude product as light yellow oil (1.4 g, yield: 91%, confirmed by 1H NMR. )
b. Preparation of compound C0055-2
A solution of C0055-1 (1.4 g, 3.72 mmol) and trifluoroacetic acid (3 mL) in dichloromethane (15 mL) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The mixture was quenched with saturated Na2CO3 solution, diluted with CH2Cl2 (20 mL) and washed with saturated Na2CO3 solution (15 mL x 2) . The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2Cl2 (20 mL x 3) . The organic layer was combined, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and evaporated to give the crude product as orange oil (0.88 g, yield: 86%, confirmed by LCMS and 1H NMR) .
c. Preparation of compound C0055-3
To the solution of C0055-2 (0.34 g, 1.25 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (0.46 mL, 2.81 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) , was added 4-acetylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (0.41g, 1.87 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 (20 mL) and washed with NaHCO3 (15 mL x 2) and water (15 mL) . The organic layer was dried and evaporated to give the crude compound as yellow solid, which was purified with silica gel column to give the pure product as white solid (290 mg, yield: 52%, 1H NMR and LCMS confirmed) .
d. Preparation of compound C0055-4
To the solution of C0055-3 (100 mg, 0.22 mmol) in methanol (10 mL) , was added Pd(OH) 2/C (20 mg) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature under H2. Thin-layer chromatography showed that the reaction was not completed, so a little more Pd(OH)2/C was added, then stirred overnight (about 18 hours) under H2. The mixture was filtered; the solution was evaporated to give the crude product as white solid (65 mg, yield: 91%, confirmed by LCMS, 1H NMR.
Preparation of C0056
Figure imgf000149_0001
a. Preparation of C0056-1
To a solution of COOll-1 (500 mg, 2.06 mmol) in dry CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added diisopropyl ethyl amine (0.68 mL, 4.12 mmol) and methane sulfonyl chloride (0.24 mL, 3.1 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The mixture was washed with saturated NaHCO3 (2 x 20 mL) and water (1 x 20 mL) . The organic layer was dried and concentrated to give the crude compound as orange oil (yield: 650 mg, 99%, confirmed by 1H NMR) . b. Preparation of C0056-2
To the solution of C0056-1 (650 mg, 2.04 mmol) in CH2CI2 (8 mL) , trifluoroacetic acid (2 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was quenched with sat Na2CC>3 solution, diluted with CH2CI2 (20 mL) and washed with Na2CC>3 solution (15 mL x 2) . The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (20 mL x 4) . The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and evaporated to give the crude product as brown solid (178 mg, yield: 40%, confirmed by LC/MS) .
c. Preparation of C0056
4-Acetylbenzene-sulfonyl chloride (0.26 g, 1.21 mmol) was added to the solution of C0056-2 (178 mg, 0.81 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (30 mL) and washed with IN HCl (20 mL X 2) and water (20 mL) . The organic layer was dried and evaporated to give the crude compound as yellow solid. Which was purified with silica gel column to give the pure product as white foam (60mg, yield: 18.5%, 1H NMR and MS confirmed, HPLC 98%) .
1H-NMR (400MHz, CDCl3) δ:8.09 (d, J = 8.4Hz, 2H), 7.86 (d, J = 8.4Hz, 2H), 3.93 (t, J = 6Hz, 2H), 3.81 (dd, J = 8.8Hz, 1.6Hz, 2H), 3.53 (t, J = 6Hz, 2H), 2.94 (s, 3H), 2.81 (s, 3H), 2.66-2.49 (m, 4H), 1.74 (d, J = 11.6Hz, 2H) . MS (ESI) calcd for Ci6H22N2O6S2 (m/z) :402.09, found: 403.3 [M+l]+, 425.2 [M+23]+. Preparation of compound C0058
Figure imgf000151_0001
C0011-1 C0058-1 C0058-2 C0058
a) Preparation of compound C0058-1 To the COOll-1 (600 mg, 2.48 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (0.82 mL, 4.96 mmol) in dichloromethane (DCM) (10 mL) , ethylsulfonyl chloride (478 mg, 3.72 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was diluted with DCM (5OmL) and washed with saturated with aqueous Na2CO3 (30 mL x 3) . The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the crude product as brown-black oil. LC-MS indicated that there was no the desired product peak. Purification with silica gel could not give the pure product.
Run#2 : Pyridine ethyl sulfonyl chloride (0.3 mL, 3.17 mmol) was added dropwise to the solution of N-Boc-piperidin-4-one (500 mg, 2.06 mmol) in 15 mL of pyridine. The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Preparation of compound C0059
Figure imgf000152_0001
C0011-1 C0059-1 C0059-2 C0059 a. Preparation of C0059-1
Run#l : Isopropylsulfonyl chloride (0.35 mL, 3.09 mmol) was added To the COOll-1 (500 mg, 2.06 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (1.02mL, 6.18 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) . The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The mixture was diluted with dichloromethane and washed with NaHCC>3 (20 mL x 2) . The organic layer was dried and evaporated to give the crude product as dark yellow oil. After checking LC-Ms, the peak of the product could not be observed, and TLC was showed it was complicated
Run#2 : Isopropyl sulfonyl chloride (0.28 mL, 2.47 mmol) was added dropwise to the solution of COOll-1 (500 mg, 2.06 mmol) in pyridine (20 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The solvent was removed by reduced pressure evaporation. The residue was diluted with 50 mL of dichloromethane and washed with 0.5N HCl (40 mL x 3) . The organic layer was dried and evaporated to give the crude product as yellow solid. LCMS showed there was no the desired peak. Preparation of compound C0060
Figure imgf000153_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0060-1
2-Mercaptoethylamine (100 mg, 1.3 mmol) was added to the solution of piperidin-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (200 mg, 1.3 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at 250C. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give the product as yellow foam (310 mg, LC-MS showed there was the desired product peak. The crude was used directly in the next step.
b. Preparation of compound C0060
4-Acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (0.348 g, 1.59 mmol) was added to the solution of C0060-1 (0.31 g, 1.59 mmol) in 10 mL of pyridine. The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed by reduced pressure evaporation, the residue was diluted with 50 mL dichloromethane, and then washed with IM HCl (30 mL X 3), and then the organic layer was dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated to give the crude product as yellow oil (0.1 g) . The crude product was further purified with silica gel column giving the title compound C0060 as white solid (200 mg, yield: 37%, HPLC: 95.99%, 1H NMR and MS confirmed) . H NMR (400MHz, CDCl3) δ: 8.11 (d, J = 8.4Hz, 2H) , 7.88 (d, J = 8.4Hz, 2H) , 3.46-3.41 (m, 2H) , 3.28 (t, J = 6Hz, 2H) , 3.01-2.93 (m, 4H) , 2.68 (s, 3H) , 2.04-1.99 (m, 4H) , 1.67 (brs, IH) . MS (ESI) calcd for C15H20N2O3S2 (m/z ) : 340.09, found: 341.1 [M+l]
Preparation of compound C0062-3
Figure imgf000154_0001
C0062-1
C0062-2 C0062-3
a. Preparation of compound C0062-1
CuCl2 (2.5 g) was added to the saturated solution of SO2 (get from the reaction of NaHSO3 and H2SO4) in glacial acetic acid (200 mL) and SO2 gas was slowly bubbled into the solution for 2 hours. 3, 4, 5-Trimethoxyaniline (10 g, 54.6 mmol) was added to the solution of concentrated HCl (40 mL) and H2O (50 mL) and the mixture was stirred for 1 hour at 0 0C. To this solution was added a solution of NaNO2 (3.77 g, 54.6 mmol) in H2O (20 mL) at such a rate that the temperature did not rise above 0 0C. The mixture was stirred for 0.5 hours and then added dropwise to the SO2 and CuCl2 saturated solution before. The reaction was then stirred for 1 hour. H2O (1000 mL) was added and continued stirring for 0.5 hours. Then the product was collected by suction filtration, washed with H2O, and dried in vacuum at 50 0C. b. Preparation of compound C0062-2
To a solution of piperidin-4-one hydrochloride (229 mg, 1.68 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) was added compound C0062-1 (300 mg, 1.12 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. To the reaction mixture 20 mL water was added, and the reaction mixture was extracted with dichloromethane three times. The organic layers was combined and was washed with IN HCl two times and brine one times, dried, concentrated under vacuum to afford 279 mg of crude product (yield: 75.7)
c. Preparation of compound C0062-3
To a solution of C0062-2 (279 mg, 0.848 mmol) in ethanol (5 mL) was added compound p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (4.51 mg, 0.024 mmol) and 2-aminoethanol (0.9 mL) . The reaction mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (30 mL) and washed with aqueous of NaHCO3 and brine, dried, concentrated under vacuum to afford 226 mg of crude product, (yield: 71.6 %) .
Preparation of compound C0065-9
Figure imgf000156_0001
a. Preparation of mixture C0065-1 and C0065-6
A suspension of phthalimide (7.35 g, 50 mmol) in epichlorohydrin (15.7 mL, 200 mmol) was boiled under reflux for 10 hours. The mixture was allowed to cool and was concentrated producing a brown oil. The crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography to obtain 4.7 g of C0065-6 as white solid (yield: 46%) and 4.1 g of C0065-1 as white solid.
b. Preparation of compound C0065-2
The mixture of compound C0065-1 and C0065-6
(3.1 g, 15 mmol) and aqueous dimethylamine (10.3 g) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. Thin-layer chromatography suggested the reaction complete. The reaction mixture was washed with CH2Cl2 for 3 times, and the water was removed under reduced pressure to obtain the crude product of C0065-2. c. Preparation of compound C0065-3
The compound C0065-2 was added into 20% hydrochloric acid (20 mL) and refluxed for 4 hours. Then the mixture was cooled to room temperature, phthalic acid was separated. The aqueous solution was washed by ether and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in NaOH (20%) and extracted with CH2Cl2 for 3 times. The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to obtain 1.1 g of the product as yellow oil (yield: 62%) .
d. Preparation of compound C0065-7
To a solution of N-Boc-piperidin-4-one (420 mg, 2.1 mmol) in ethanol (4 mL) was added compound C0065-3 (500 mg, 4.2 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (30 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous Na2Cθ3 (30 mL x 6) . The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, then concentrated to give 600 mg of compound C0065-4 as a yellow oil (yield: 95%)
e. Preparation of compound C0065-8
4-Acetylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (200 mg, 0.9 mmol) was added to a solution of compound C0065-7 (600 mg, 2.0 mmol) in pyridine (4 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified with silica gel to obtain 220 mg of the title compound as a white solid (yield: 50%) f . Preparation of compound C0065-9
To the solution of compound C0065-8 (220 mg, 0.45 mmol) in 3 mL CH2Cl2 was add 0.5 mL CF3COOH and the mixture was kept stirring for 1 hour at room temperature. To the mixture was added 30 mL of CH2Cl2 and washed with saturated sodium carbonate solution (30 mL x 3) . The organic layer was dried and concentrated to get the crude product 150 mg as white solid.
Preparation of compound C0066
Figure imgf000158_0001
C0066-1 C0066 a. Preparation of compound C0066-1
Triethylamine (606 mg, 6.0 mmol) and piperidin-4-one (297 mg, 3.0 mmol) were added to a solution of 4-acetylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (656 mg, 3.0 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solution was washed with water, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to obtain the title product as yellow solid (643 mg, Yield: 76%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0066
To a solution of 2-aminoacetamide hydrochloride (252 mg, 2.28 mmol) in CH3OH (20 mL) was added triethylamine (230 mg, 2.28 mmol) and C0066-1 (643 mg, 2.28 mmol) . The mixture was heated to reflux overnight (about 18 hours) . The solution was cooled and filtered to obtain C0066 as white solid (550 mg, Yield: 72%) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) : 8.53 (s, IH) ; 8.30 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H) ; 8.00 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H) ; 3.51- 3.37 (m, 2H) ; 3.19 (s, 2H) ; 3.11 (s, IH) ; 2.95-2.91 (m, 2H) ; 2.78 (s, 3H) ; 2.63-2.61 (m, 4H) ; MS (ESI) calcd ^rCi5H19N3O4S (m/z) : 337.39. found: 338.3 [M+l] +.
Preparation of compound C0068-2
Figure imgf000159_0001
C0068-1 C0068-2
a. Preparation of compound C0068-1
Piperidin-4-one hydrochloride hydrate (92 mg, 0.6 mmol) in pyridine (2 mL) was treated with 4-bromo-2- (trifluoromethyl) benzene-1-sulfonyl chloride (194 mg, 0.6 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. To the residue was added CH2Cl2 (50 mL) , the solution was washed with IN HCl (20 mL x 3 ) , dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to give the title product as yellow solid (117 mg; yield: 50.5%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0068-2 p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (1.59 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (0.32 mL, 5.54 mmol) were added to a solution of compound C0068-1 (107 mg, 0.2S mmol) in ethanol (4 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. To the residue was added CH2Cl2 (70 mL) and washed with saturated NaHCO3 (25 mL x 4), then dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the product as yellow oil (110 mg, yield: 91.6%) .
Preparation of compound C0071-2
Figure imgf000160_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0071-1
Piperidin-4-one hydrochloride hydrate (95 mg, 0.62 mmol) in pyridine (3 mL) was treated with 2-bromo-4- (trifluoromethyl) benzene-1-sulfonyl chloride (200 mg, 0.62 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (30 mL) and washed with 1 N HCl (30 mL χ3) . The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, and concentrated to give the crude product as yellow solid (150 mg; yield: 62.6%) . The structure was confirmed by 1H-NMR & LC-MS.
b. Preparation of compound C0071-2
To the solution of compound C0071-1 (145 mg, 0.376 mmol) in ethanol (3 mL) was added 2-aminoethanol (0.44 mL) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (2 mg, 0.01 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (30 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (30 mL x 6) . The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, then concentrated to give compound C0071-2 as yellow oil (140 mg; yield: 86%) . The structure was confirmed by 1H NMR & LC-MS.
Preparation of compound C0077
Figure imgf000161_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0077-1
Piperidin-4-one hydrochloride hydrate (153.5 mg, 1 mmol) in pyridine (2 mL) was treated with 4-bromo-3- (trifluoromethyl) benzene-1-sulfonyl chloride (323.5 mg, 1 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. To the residue was added CH2Cl2 (50 mL) , then the solution was washed with IN HCl (20 mL x 3), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the title product as white solid (216 mg; yield: 56%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0077-2 p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (3.1 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (0.62 mL, 10.7 mmol) were added to a solution of compound C0077-1 (207 mg, 0.54 mmol) in ethanol (5 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. To the residue was added CH2Cl2 (70 mL) and washed with saturated NaHCO3 (25 mL x 4), then dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the product as yellow oil (210 mg, yield: 90.7%) .
Preparation of compound C0078
Figure imgf000162_0002
4-bromo-2-fluorobenzene- 1-sulfonyl chloride
Figure imgf000162_0001
C0078-1
C0078-2
a. Preparation of compound C0078-1
To a solution of piperidin-4-one hydrochloride hydrate (169 mg, 1.1 mmol) in pyridine (2 mL) was added 4-bromo-2-fluorobenzene-1-sulfonyl chloride (300 mg, 1.1 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (30 mL) and washed with IN HCl (30 mL x 3) . The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, and concentrated to give the crude product as white solid (230 mg, yield: 62.4%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0078-2
2-Aminoethanol (0.78 mL, 13.39 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (3.8 mg, 0.02 mmol) was added to the solution of compound C0078-1 (225 mg, 0.67 mmol) in ethanol (7 mL) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. Then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (30 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (30 mL x 6) . The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, and concentrated to give compound C0078-2 as yellow oil (260 mg)
Preparation of compound C0079M-7
Figure imgf000163_0001
C0079M-1 C0079M-2 CQQ79M-4
Figure imgf000163_0002
a. Preparation of compound C0079M-5 Compound C0079M-4 2HCl (311 mg, 1.44 mmol) was dissolved in water (20 ml) and was added saturated aqueous NaHCO3 to pH=7 and washed with dichloromethane . The water phase was concentrated and the residue was dissolved in ethanol. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to afford 270 mg of compound C0079M-4. A mixture of C0079M—4 and t-butyl-4-oxopiperidine-l- carboxylate (344 mg, 1.73 mmol) in ethanol (5 ml) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature . b. Preparation of compound C0079M-6
The mixture of compound C0079M—5 (967 mg,
2.48 mmol) and 4-acetylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (597 mg, 2.73 mmol) in pyridine (10 ml) was stirred overnight at room temperature. TLC suggested the reaction complete. The mixture was concentrated to remove the solvent. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane and was washed with 0.1 N HCl and brine, dried, concentrated to afford 854 mg of crude product. The crude product was purified via column chromatography (CH2Cl2- CH2C12/CH3OH=10/1 ) to afford a product (440 mg, yield: 40%) .
Preparation of compound C0080M-6
Figure imgf000164_0001
C0080M-4 C0080M-5 C0080M-6
a. Preparation of compound C0080M-1
Boc-D-Lys-OH (2.46 g, 9.4 mmol) was suspended in CH2OH (80 mL) , and 40% aq HCHO (1.6 mL, 19 mmol) was added, followed by 10% Pd/C (200 mg) . The reaction mixture was stirred under H2 for 2 days. Then the catalyst was filtered off, and the filtrate was concentrated to dryness. Diethyl ether (100 mL) was added to the resulting oil, and stirring was continued to obtain a white solid, which was filtered off and washed with diethyl ether (2.6 g, yield: 100%, confirmed by 1H NMR) .
b. Preparation of compound C0080M-2 C0080-1 (375 mg, 1.44 mmol) was dissolved in HCI/CH2OH (8 mL), and the reaction mixture was stirred at reflux for 3 hours. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to remove the solvent to obtain the HCl salt of the title product as white solid (354 mg, yield: 99.5%, confirmed by 1H NMR) . Because the yield was low, the aqueous part was concentrated in vacuo to obtain yellow oil (57 mg, yield: 55.8%) .
c. Preparation of compound C0080M-3 C0080-2 (354 mg, 1.43 mmol) was suspended in THF (10 mL) and LiAH4 (326 mg, 8.60 mmol) was added slowly at O0C, and the reaction mixture was stirred at O0C to room temperature for 1.5 hours. Then saturated Na2SO4 was added to quench the reaction and the mixture was filtered, then the organic layer was concentrated in vacuo to obtain the title product as yellow oil (150 mg, yield: 71.8%, confirmed by 1H NMR) .
d. Preparation of compound C0080-4
To a solution of N-Boc-piperidin-4-one (150 mg, 0.75 mmol) in ethanol (2 mL) was added compound C0080-3 (120 mg, 0.75 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. To the residue was added CH2Cl2 (70 mL) and washed with saturated NaHCO3 (25 mL x 4), then dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the product as yellow oil (234 mg, yield: 91.5%) .
e. Preparation of compound C0080-5
4-Acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (180 mg, 0.82 mmol) was added to a solution of compound C0080-4 (234 mg, 0.69 mmol) in pyridine (2 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. To the residue was added CH2Cl2 (70 mL) and washed with saturated NaHCO3 (25 mL x 4), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the crude product. The crude product was purified by chromatograph with CH2Cl2 : CH2OH=50 : 1 to 3:1 to obtain the title product as yellow oil (80 mg, yield: 22.2%) .
f . Preparation of compound C0080-6
To a solution of compound C0080-5 (80 mg, 0.15 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (3 mL) was added CF3COOH (0.2 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. CH2Cl2 was added and the mixture was washed with saturated Na2CO3. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, concentrated in vacuo to obtain the product as yellow oil (67 mg)
Preparation of compound C0081M-7
Figure imgf000167_0001
C0081 M-2 C0081M-3
Figure imgf000167_0002
a. Preparation of compound C0081M-1
To a stirred solution of L-Boc-Ser-OMe
(6.85 g, 31.2 mmol) and imidazole (5.3 g, 78 mmol) in dimethylformamide (60 ml) was added dropwise t-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (7.05 g, 46.8 mmol) . The reaction was stirred at 5O0C overnight (about 18 hours) after which the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane and successively washed with a 1 N HCl solution and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to give the crude product. The crude reaction product was subjected to column chromatography (petroleum ether: dichloromethane=l : 1 ) to obtain the title product as light yellow oil (7.4 g; yield: 71.2%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0081M-2
DIBAL-H was added to a solution of C0081M-1 (13.8 g, 41.4 mmol) in dry toluene (100 ml) (1.2 M in toluene, 41.4 ml, 50 mmol) in an argon atmosphere at such a rate that the temperature didn't rise above 7O0C. After stirring for 2 hours, HC1/CH3OH solution was added carefully. The reaction mixture was poured into 10% aqueous HCl solution. The organic layer was separated and washed with brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to get the crude product. The crude product was purified with column chromatography (petroleum ether: ethyl acetate=40:l to 10:1) to obtain the title product as a colorless liquid (8.24 g, yield: 66%) .
c. Preparation of compound C0081M-3
To a solution of C0081M-2 (8.24 g, 27 mmol) in methanol (75 ml) was added NaOAc (2.16 g, 28 mmol) and dimethylamine hydrochloride (2.756 g, 33.8 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, then NaCNBH3 (1.7 g, 27 mmol) was added. The mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Water was added and the solution was extracted with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to get the crude product. The crude product was purified with column chromatography (petroleum ether : ethyl acetate=40:l to 1:1) to obtain the title product as a colorless liquid (2.512 g, yield: 28 %) .
Preparation of compound C0083M
Figure imgf000168_0001
This compound is prepared using procedures illustrated elsewhere herein. Preparation of compound C0086M
Figure imgf000169_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0086M-1
To a stirred solution of glycinamide hydrochloride (276 mg, 2.5 mmol) and triethylamine (0.35 mL, 2.5 mmol) in methanol (10 mL) was added N-Boc-piperidin-4-one (500 mg, 2.5 mmol) . The reaction was stirred under reflux overnight (about 18 hours) after which the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography to obtain the title product as white solid (500 mg; yield: 78%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0086M-2
4-Acetylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (258 mg, 1.18 mmol) was added to a solution of compound C0086M-1 (250 mg, 0.98 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) . The mixture was stirred at 6O0C (yield: 46%) overnight (about 18 hours) . Then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography to obtain the title product as yellow solid (250 mg; yield: 58%)
c. Preparation of compound C0086M
To a solution of compound C0086M-2 (150 mg, 0.343 mmol) in 5 mL dichloromethane was add 0.5 mL CF3COOH, and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at room temperature. To the mixture was added 30 mL dichloromethane, and the composition formed was washed with saturated sodium carbonate solution (30 mL x 3) . The organic layer was dried and concentrated to get 90 mg of the crude product as light yellow solid. The crude product was purified by column chromatography to obtain the title product as little yellow solid (50 mg; yield: 43.2%) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) : 9.49 (s, IH) ; 8.14 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) ; 8.04 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) ; 3.93 (s, 2H) ; 2.87 (m, 2H) ; 2.72-2.59 (m, 2H) ; 2.65 (s, 3H) , 2.33 (td, J = 12.4, 4.4 Hz, 2H) ; 1.51 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 2H) ; LCMS (ESI) calcd for Ci5H19N3O4S (m/z) : 337.39; f ound: 338.4 [M+l ] + .
Preparation of compound C0087M
Figure imgf000170_0001
2-Hydroxyacetamide (210 mg, 2.8 mmol) and toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (3.0 mg) was added to a solution of C0066-1 (200 mg, 0.7 mmol) in dimethylformamide (10 mL) . The mixture was stirred at 1200C overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with dichloromethane and a yellow solid formed. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated and purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane : methanol =100:1 to 30:1) to obtain the impure product as yellow solid
(30 mg, yield: 13%) . The impure product was recrystallized with chloroform and n-hexane to obtain the title product as yellow solid (20 mg, Yield: 8%) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.11 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 2H); 7.87 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H); 6.71 (s, IH); 4.15
(s, 2H) ; 3.65 (m, 2H) ; 2.83-2.77 (m, 2H) ; 2.67 (s, 3H) ; 1.97-1.88 (m, 4H) ; MS (ESI) calcd for Ci5H18N2O5S
(m/z) : 338.38; found: 339.4 [M+l] +.
Preparation of compound C0088M
Figure imgf000171_0001
1-methylpiperidin-4-one C0088M-1 C0088M a. Preparation of compound C0088M-1
2-aminoethanol (0.13 mL, 2.1 mmol) was added to a solution of l-methylpiperidin-4-one (227 mg, 2.0 mmol) in ethanol (4 mL) . The reaction was stirred under reflux for 2 hours. The solvent was removed in vacuo to obtain the crude product C0088M-1 as yellow oil. The crude product was used for the next step directly with out purification.
b. Preparation of compound C0088M
To a solution of compound C0088M—1 in pyridine (5 mL) was added 4-methoxybenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (207 mg, 1.0 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography to obtain the crude product. The crude product was purified by preparative HPLC to obtain the title product as yellow oil (35 mg; yield: 10.7%; confirmed by 1H NMR and LC-MS, purity: 98.1% by HPLC) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.80 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H); 6.96 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H); 3.94 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 3.87 (s, 3H); 3.50 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 2.74 (m, 2H); 2.53 (td, J = 12.8, 4.4 Hz, 2H); 2.27 (s, 3H); 2.19 (t, J = 11.6 Hz, 2H); 1.57 (d, J = 12.4 Hz, 2H); LCMS(ESI) calcd for Ci5H22N2O4S (m/z) : 326.41; found:327.3 [M+l]+.
Preparation of compound C0089M
1
Figure imgf000172_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0089M-1
To a solution of l-ethylpiperidin-4-one (254 mg, 2.0 mmol) in ethanol (4.0 mL) was added 2- aminoethanol (0.13 mL, 2.1 mmol) . The reaction was refluxed for 3 hours. The solvent was removed in vacuo to obtain the crude product of C0094M-1 as a red oil. The crude product was used for the next step directly with out purification.
b. Preparation of compound C0089M The crude C0089M-1 was dissolved in pyridine (2.5 mL) and added 4-methoxybenzenesulfonyl chloride (207 mg, 1.0 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography to give the crude product as yellow solid (80 mg; yield: 24%) . The crude product was purified by preparative HPLC to obtain the title product as white solid (40 mg; yield: 11.5%, confirmed by 1H-NMR and LC-MS, purity: 99% by HPLC) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.80 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 2H); 6.96 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 2H); 3.93 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 3.86 (s, 3H); 3.50 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 2.86-2.82 (m, 2H); 2.52-2.49 (m, 2H); 2.42 (q, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H); 2.16 (t, J = 11.2 Hz, 2H); 1.60-1.56 (m, 2H); 1.07 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) calcd for Ci6H24N2O4S (m/z) : 340.44; found: 341.4 [M+l] + .
Preparation of compound C0090M
Figure imgf000173_0001
C0027 C0090M
C0027 (200 mg, 0.64 mmol) was dissolved in acetone (20 mL) , and (bromomethyl) cyclopropane (86 mg, 0.64 mmol) was added, followed by K2CO3 (265 mg, 1.92 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred at reflux for 7 hours and then stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was filtered and concentrated in vacuo to obtain the crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography eluted with ethyl acetate to obtain 220 mg of the title product as light yellow oil (yield: 93.9%) . The structure was confirmed by 1H NMR & LC-MS. Purity: 99.6% by HPLC. H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.81 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) ; 6.96 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) ; 3.93 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H) ; 3.87 (s, 3H) ; 3.50 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H) ; 2.97 (m, 2H) ; 2.52 (dt, J = 4.4, 10.2 Hz, 2H) ; 2.26-2.17 (m, 4H) ; 1.58 (m, 2H) ; 0.92-0.80 (m, IH) ; 0.52-0.48 (m, 2H) ; ; 0.09-0.05 (m, 2H) ; MS (ESI) calcd for C18H26N2O4S (m/z) : 366.16; found; 367.2 [M+l] + .
Preparation of compound C0091M
Figure imgf000174_0001
C0027 (50 mg, 0.16 mmol) was dissolved in acetone (5 mL) , and 3-bromoprop-l-ene (20 mg, O.lδmmol) was added, followed by K2CO3 (66 mg, 0.48 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred at reflux for 7 hours, and then stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was filtered and concentrated in vacuo to obtain the crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography with ethyl acetate to obtain 30 mg of the title product as colorless oil (30 mg, yield: 53.3%) . The structure was confirmed by 1H NMR & LC-MS, purity: 99.9% by HPLC.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.79 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H); 6.95 (d, J = 8.48 Hz, 2H); 5.92-5.84 (m, IH); 5.18-5.10 (m, 2H); 3.92 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H); 3.86 (s, 3H); 3.48 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H); 2.99 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 2.82 (dt, J = 2.8, 11.2 Hz, 2H); 2.50 (dt, J = 4.8, 12.8 Hz, 2H); 2.16 (dt, J = 2.0, 13.6 Hz, 2H) ; 1.57 (d, J = 11.2 Hz, 2H) ; MS (ESI) calcd for C17H24N2O4S (m/z) : 352.15; found: 353.4 [M+l] + .
Preparation of compound C0092M
Figure imgf000175_0001
C0092M
This compound is prepared using procedures illustrated elsewhere herein.
Preparation of compound C0093M
pyridine
1 -m -1
Figure imgf000175_0002
Figure imgf000175_0003
a. Preparation of compound C0088M-1
2-Aminoethanol (0.13 mL, 2.1 mmol) was added to a solution of l-methylpiperidin-4-one (227 mg, 2.0 mmol) in ethanol (4 mL) . The reaction was stirred under reflux for 2 hours. The solvent was removed in vacuo to obtain the crude product of C0088M-1 as yellow oil. The crude product was used for the next step directly with out purification. b. Preparation of compound C0093M
To a solution of compound C0088M—1 in pyridine (5 mL) was added 4-methoxybenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (219 mg, 1.0 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography to obtain the crude product. The crude product was purified by preparative HPLC to obtain the title product as yellow oil (20 mg; yield: 6.0 %; confirmed by 1H-NMR and LC-MS, purity: 99 % by HPLC) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.07 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2H); 7.97 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2H); 3.97 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 3.56 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 2.75 (m, 2H); 2.66 (s, 3H); 2.53 (td, J = 12.8, 4.4 Hz, 2H); 2.28 (s, 3H); 2.20 (t, J = 11.6 Hz, 2H); 1.56 (d, J = 12.4 Hz, 2H); LCMS(ESI) calcd for Ci6H22N2O4S (m/z) : 338.42;.. found:339.5 [M+l]+.
Preparation of compound C0094M
1-
Figure imgf000176_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0094M-1
To a solution of l-ethylpiperidin-4-one (254 mg, 2.0 mmol) in ethanol (4.0 mL) was added 2- aminoethanol (0.13 mL, 2.1 mmol) . The reaction was refluxed for 3 hours. Then the solvent was removed in vacuo to obtain the crude product of C0094M-1 as a red oil. b. Preparation of compound C0094M The crude C0094-1 was dissolved in pyridine (2.5 mL) and added 4-acetylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (218 mg, 1.0 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography to give the crude product as yellow solid (90 mg; yield: 26%) . The crude product was purified by Pre-HPLC to obtain the title product as white solid (50 mg; yield: 14%, confirmed by 1H NMR and LC-MS, purity: 99 % by HPLC) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.07 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H); 7.97 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H); 3.97 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H); 3.57 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 2.87-2.83 (m, 2H); 2.65 (s, 3H); 2.52-2.48 (m, 2H); 2.44 (q, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H); 2.20-2.17 (m, 2H); 1.57 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 2H); 1.08 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) calcd for Ci7H24N2O4S (m/z) : 352.45; found: 353.4 [M+l] + .
Preparation of compound C0095M
Figure imgf000177_0001
C0095M-2 C0095M
To the solution of compound C0095M-2 (260 mg, 1.33 mmol) in pyridine (2.5 mL) was added 4- acetylbenzene-1-sulfonyl chloride (348 mg, 1.59 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to remove the pyridine. The residue was dissolved into dichloromethane and washed with saturated NaHCO3. Then, the organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to obtain the crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography to obtain 464 mg of C0095M. The product was purified by preparative HPLC to obtain the title product (240 mg, yield: 47.8%) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.07 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H); 7.97 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H); 3.96 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 3.56 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 2.97 (dt, J = 2.4, 11.2 Hz, 2H); 2.65 (s, 3H); 2.51 (dt, J = 4.8, 12.8 Hz, 2H); 2.25 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H); 2.22-2.15 (m, 2H); 1.56 (dd, J = 2.0, 13.2 Hz, 2H); 0.87-0.83 (m, IH); 0.52-0.48 (m, 2H); 0.09-0.05 (m, 2H); MS (ESI) calcd for Ci9H26N2O4S (m/z) : 378.16; found: 379.4 [M+l] + .
Preparation of compound C0096M
Figure imgf000178_0001
C0046 (60 mg, 0.185 mmol) was dissolved in acetone (5 mL) , and 3-bromoprop-l-ene (22 mg, 0.185 mmol) was added, followed by K2CO3 (77 mg, 0.556 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred at reflux for 4 hours, and then stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was filtered and concentrated in vacuo to obtain the crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography with ethyl acetate to obtain 43 mg of the title product as white solid (43 mg, yield: 63.9%) 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : 8.06 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 2H) ; 7.96 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 2H) ; 5.90-5.83 (m, IH) ; 5.18-5.11 (m, 2H) ; 3.96 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 3.55 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 2.99 (d, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 2.82 (dt, J = 2.0, 11.2 Hz, 2H) ; 2.65 (s, 3H) ; 2.50 (dt, J = 4.8, 13.6 Hz, 2H) ; 2.18 (dt, J = 2.4, 9.6 Hz, 2H) ; 1.56 (dd, J = 2.4, 10.8 Hz, 2H) ; MS (ESI) calcd for Ci8H24N2O4S (m/z) : 364.15; found: 365.3 [M+l] + .
Preparation of compound C0097M
Figure imgf000179_0001
This compound is prepared using procedures illustrated elsewhere herein.
Preparation of compound C0098M
Figure imgf000179_0002
a. Preparation of compound C0084-1
2-Amino-3- ( lH-imidazol-4-yl ) propanoic acid (5 g, 32.26 mmol) in HC1/CH3OH (IN, 100 mL) was heated to reflux for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated to remove the solvent to obtain 7.5 g of the title product as white solid. b. Preparation of compound C0098M-2
220 mg of C0084-1 was dissolved in 10 mL of saturated NH4OH (aq) . The solution was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solution was extracted with CHCI3 : CH2OH=4 : 1 (6 times) and the water was evaporated. The residue was washed with acetone and CHCI3 to obtain the crude product (the mixture of the product and NH4Cl) as white solid (210 mg) . The structure was confirmed by 1H NMR & LC- MS (target M+l=155, material M+l=170) .
c. Preparation of compound C0098M C0098M-2 (200 mg, 1.3 mmol) was added to
1- ( 4-acetylphenylsulfonyl) -piperidin-4-one (365 mg, 1.3 mmol) in methanol (10 mL) . The reaction was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) and heated to reflux for 3 hours after which the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography to obtain the title product as a white solid (65 mg; yield: 17%) . The structure was confirmed by 1H-NMR & LC-MS. Purity 98.3% by HPLC, shown as follows:
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) : 11.74 (s, IH); 8.47 (s, 0.8 H); 8.18 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H); 7.88 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H); 7.44 (s, IH); 7.15 (s, 0.2H); 6.99 (s, 0.2H); 6.72 (s, 0.8H); 3.51 (s, IH); 3.19 (s, 2H); 2.95- 2.56 (m, 7H); 1.61 (m, 3H); 1.46 (s, IH); MS (ESI) calcd for Ci9H23N5O4S (m/z) : 417.48; found: 418.3 [M+l]+. Preparation of compound C0099M
Figure imgf000181_0001
Prepared using procedures illustrated elsewhere herein.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.06 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) ; 7.96 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) ; 4.18 (q, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H) ; 3.96 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 3.56 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H) ; 3.21 (s, 2H) ; 2.85 (dd, J = 1.2, 8.8 Hz, 2H) ; 2.66 (s, 3H) ; 2.57-2.45 (m, 4H) ; 1.54 (d, J = 11.2 Hz, 2H) ; 1.27 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H) ; MS (ESI) calcd for C19H26N2O6S (m/z) : 410.15; found: 411.4 [M+l] +.
Preparation of compound COlOOM
Figure imgf000181_0002
Prepared by hydrolysis of compound C0099M.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.07 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) ; 7.91 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) ; 3.91 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 3.47 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 3.39 (m, 4H) ; 2.94 (br, m, 2H) ; 2.63 (dt, J = 4.8, 14.4 Hz, 2H) ; 2.55 (s, 3H) ; 1.73 (d, J = 12.8 Hz, 2H) ; MS (ESI) calcd for Ci7H22N2O6S (m/z) : 382.12; found: 383.2 [M+l] + . Preparation of compound COlOlM
Figure imgf000182_0001
Prepared using procedures illustrated elsewhere herein.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.06 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2H) ; 7.95 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2H) ; 3.96 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 3.56 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 2.81 (dd, J = 2.0, 9.2 Hz, 2H) ; 2.66 (s, 3H) ; 2.48 (dt, J = 2.0, 8.4 Hz, 2H) ; 2.32 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H) ; 2.17 (dt, J = 1.6, 13.2 Hz, 2H) ; 1.55 (d, J = 11.2 Hz, 2H) ; 1.47-1.43 (m, 2H) ; 1.34-1.28 (m, 2H) ; 0.92 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H) ; MS (ESI) calcd for Ci9H28N2O4S (m/z) : 380.18; found: 381.4 [M+l] +.
Preparation of compound C0102M
Figure imgf000182_0002
Prepared using procedures illustrated elsewhere herein.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.80 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2H); 6.96 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2H); 3.93 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 3.86 (s, 3H); 3.49 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H); 2.81 (dt, J = 2.0, 10.8 Hz, 2H); 2.49 (dt, J = 4.8, 12.8 Hz, 2H); 2.33-2.29 (m, 2H); 2.16 (dt, J = 2.8, 13.2 Hz, 2H); 1.57 (d, J = 10.4 Hz, 2H); 1.47-1.42 (m, 2H); 1.34-1.28 (m, 2H); 0.91 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, 3H); MS ( E S I ) cal cd f or C18H28N2O4S ( m/ z ) : 36 8 . 1 8 ; f ound : 36 9 . 3 [ M+ l ] + .
Preparation of compound C0104M
hydrochloride C0104M-1
Figure imgf000183_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0104M-1
A mixture of 2-aminoacetamide hydrochloride (2.0 g, 18 mmol), triethylamine (3.7 mL) and benzaldehyde (2.3 g, 22 mmol) in methanol (40 mL) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. To the reaction mixture NaBH4 (1.0 g) was added slowly. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1.5 hours until thin-layer chromatography showed the reaction complete. The solid was filtered. The filtrate was concentrated to remove the solvent. The residue was dissolved in water and ethyl acetate (EA) . The mixture was extracted with EA and the organic layers were combined and dried and concentrated. Ether was added to the residue ether when the solid was appeared. The solid was dried to obtain the final product (1.3 g, Yield: 45%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0104M-1 C0104M-1 (100 mg, 0.61 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (5 mL) and l-methyl-4-piperidone (69 mg, 0.61 mmol) was added, followed by triethylamine 0.085 mL, 0.61 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred at reflux overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to obtain the crude product. The crude product was purified by chromatography with CH2C12 : CH2OH=50 : 1 to 10 : 1 to obtain 75 mg of the t it le product as white solid ( yield : 48 % ) .
Preparation of compound C0105M
Figure imgf000184_0001
C0103M C0105M
C0103M (338 mg, 2.0 mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (10 mL) and NaH (840 mg, 20.0 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Then benzylchloride (253 mg, 2.0 mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . H2O was added to quench the reaction and the mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (DCM) (3x) . The organic layer was washed with IM HCl (3x)and the aqueous layer was washed with DCM, alkalized with IM NaOH to pH 8, and extracted with DCM (3x) . The organic layer was washed with saturated NaCl (Ix), dried over Na2SO4, and then concentrated in vacuo to obtain the crude product. The crude product was purified by chromatography with DCM: actone=4 : 1 to 2:1 and DCM:CH3OH=10:1 to 6:1 to obtain 110 mg of the product as colorless oil (110 mg, yield: 21.2%) . Preparation of compound C0106M-1
Figure imgf000185_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0106M-1 l-Methyl-4-piperidone (200 mg, 1.77 mmol) was dissolved in ethanol (2 mL) , and ethanol amine (97 mg, 1.60 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to obtain the crude product. The crude product was used by next step without any purification (184 mg, yield: 66.6%) .
a. Preparation of compound C0106M
To the solution of compound C0106M-1 (184 mg, 1.18 mmol) in pyridine (2.5 mL) was added 4-methylsulfonylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (360 mg, 1.42 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The precipitated was filtrated to obtain the crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography to obtain 170 mg of the title product as light yellow solid (170 mg, yield: 38.5%) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) : 8.09-8.02 (m, 4H) ; 3.92 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 3.48 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H) ; 3.19-3.15 (m, 2H) ; 3.08 (s, 3H) ; 2.91-2.83 (m, 2H) ; 2.59 (s, 3H) , 2.58-2.51 (m, 2H) ; 1.75 (d, J = 14.8 Hz, 2H) ; calcd for C15H22N2O5S2 (m/z) : 374.1; found: 375.2 [M+l]+. Preparation of compound C0108M
Figure imgf000186_0002
N-methyl-piperidone
Figure imgf000186_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0108M-1
To a solution of N-methyl-piperidone (227 mg, 2.1mmol) in ethanol (2 mL) was added compound C0065—3 (213 mg, 1.8 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product as yellow oil. The crude product was used for next step without any further purification (440 mg; yield: 100%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0108M
4-Acetylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (473 mg, 2.2 mmol) was added to a solution of compound C0108M-1 (384 mg, 1.8 mmol) in pyridine (2 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with dichloromethane (100 mL) and washed with saturated sodium carbonate solution (50 mLχ3) . The organic layer was dried and concentrated to get the crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane: acetone=l : 1) to obtain the title compound as yellow solid. 100 mg of crude compound C0108M was purified by preparative thin-layer chromatography (CH2Cl2ICH2OH: MeOH= 8 : 1) to get the compound as little yellow solid (35 mg; yield: 5%) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.07 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) ; 7.96 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) ; 4.24-4.20 (m, IH) ; 3.75 (dd, J = 8.4, 5.6 Hz, IH) ; 3.11 (t, J = 8.8 Hz, IH) ; 2.74 (m, 2H) ; 2.66 (s, 3H) ; 2.61 (dd, J = 12.8, 4.4 Hz, IH) ; 2.46 (d, J = 5.6 Hz, 2H) ; 2.40 (dd, J = 13.2, 4.4 Hz, IH) ; 2.27 (s, 3H) , 2.26 (s, 3H) , 2.24- 2.18 (m, 5H) ; 1.72 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, IH) ; 1.41 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, IH) ; LCMS (ESI) calcd for Ci9H29N3O4S (m/z) : 395.52; found:396.4 [M+l] +.
Preparation of compound C0109M
Figure imgf000187_0001
C0109M-1 C0109M a. Preparation of compound C0109M-1
To a solution of compound C0084M—2 (617 mg, 4.0 mmol) in methanol (15 mL) was added l-methylpiperidin-4-one (227 mg, 2.0 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at 700C overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane : methanol=2 : 1 ) to obtain the title compound as yellow solid (130 mg; yield: 26%) . Preparation of compound COlIlM
Figure imgf000188_0001
com M
This compound is prepared using procedures illustrated elsewhere herein.
Preparation of compound C0114M
Figure imgf000188_0002
a. Preparation of compound C0115M-1
A stirred solution of glycinamide hydrochloride (1.65 g, 15 mmol) in triethylamine (2.1 mL) and methanol (50 mL) was treated with N-Boc-piperidin-4-one (3.0 g, 15 mmol) . The reaction was stirred under reflux overnight (about 18 hours) after which the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography (CH2CI2 to CH2Cl2ICH2OH =10:1) to obtain the title product as white solid (3.04 g; yield: 79%) . The structure was confirmed by 1H NMR.
b. Preparation of compound C0114M-1
To a solution of C0115M-1 (100 mg, 0.4 mmol) in dimethylformamide (DMF) (2.5 mL) , was added 64 mg of NaH as 60% dispersion in mineral oil. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Then a solution of dichloromethane (55 mg, 0.32 mmol) in 0.5 mL of absolute DMF was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) . Water was added and the solution was extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was washed with water, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by preparative thin-layer chromatography (CH2Cl2ICH2OH: MeOH=30:l) to obtain the crude product as yellow oil (target M+l= 345) (30 mg) . Judged by 1H NMR & LC-MS, the product was a mixture of the following 2 compounds.
Figure imgf000189_0001
C0114M-1 C0115M-2
The mixture was purified by preparative thin-layer chromatography (dichloromethane: acetone=4:l) to obtain the title product as yellow oil (9 mg) .
c. Preparation of compound C0114M
To the solution of C0114M (200 mg, 0.58 mmol) in 3.0 mL of dichloromethane was add 0.3 mL of CF3COOH and the mixture was stirred for 1 hour at room temperature. Then CH3CH2OH/NH3 was added and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. 10 mL of dichloromethane was added and white solid formed. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified with column chromatography using a stationary phase of aluminum oxide (CH2Cl2: CH3OH = 100:1 to 30:1) to obtain the title product as colorless oil (30 mg, yield: 21%) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.32-7.23 (m, 5H) ; 4.46 (s, 2H) ; 3.54 (s, 2H) ; 2.99-2.89 (m, 4H) ; 2.02 (s, 2H) ; 1.86-1.79 (m, 2H) ; 1.43-1.40 (m, 2H) ; MS (ESI) calcd for C14H19N3O (m/z) : 245.32; found: 246.3 [M+l] +.
Preparation of compound C0115M
Figure imgf000190_0001
N-Boc-piperidin-4-one C0115M-1 C0115M-2 C0115M a. Preparation of compound C0115M-1
N-Boc-piperidin-4-one (3.0 g, 15 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of glycinamide hydrochloride (1.65 g, 15 mmol) in triethylamine (2.1 mL) and methanol (50 mL) . The reaction was stirred under reflux overnight (about 18 hours) after which the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography (CH2CI2 to CH2Cl2ICH2OH =10:1) to obtain the title product as white solid (3.04 g; yield: 79%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0115M-2
To a solution of C0115M-1 (306 mg, 1.2 mmol) in dimethylformamide (5.0 mL) was added 1- (bromomethyl) benzene (225 mg, 1.32 mmol) . The mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Water was added and white solid was formed. The mixture was filtered and the collected solid was washed with water and n-hexane . Then the solid was dried to obtain the title product as white solid (200 mg, Yield: 48%, confirmed by 1H NMR) .
c. Preparation of compound C0115M
To the solution of C0115M-2 (200 mg, 0.58 mmol) in 3.0 mL of dichloromethane was add 0.3 mL of CF3COOH and the mixture was kept stirring for 1 hour at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure quickly and CH2CI2OH/NH3 was added. Thin-layer chromatography suggested there was new compound formed. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was purified with aluminum oxide chromatography (CH2C12:CH2OH=100 : 1 to 5:1) to obtain the 2 batches of product as white solid (40 mg, yield: 28%, HPLC: 90%; 30 mg, yield: 21%, HPLC: 82%) . The 40 mg of sample C0115 was recrystallized with chloroform and n-hexane to obtain the title product as white solid (19 mg, yield 14%) . The structure was confirmed by 1H NMR and LC-MS (target M+l= 246) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.18 (s, IH); 7.34- 7.24 (m, 5H); 3.77 (s, 2H); 3.23 (s, 2H); 3.15 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 2H); 2.77 (t, J = 12.0 Hz, 2H); 1.98-1.91 (m, 2H); 1.73-1.68 (m, 2H); MS (ESI) calcd for C14H19N3O (m/z) : 245.32; found: 246.3 [M+l] + .
Preparation of compound C0116M
Figure imgf000191_0001
C01 16M-1 C01 16M-2 C01 16M a. Preparation of compound C0116M-1
To a solution of N-Boc-piperidin-4-one (0.3 g, 1.5 mmol) in ethanol (3.0 mL) was added ethanolamine (0.3 mL) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hour) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 and washed with saturated aqueous Na2CO3. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, concentrated to obtain the title product as yellow oil (327 mg, yield: 90%)
b. Preparation of compound C0116M-2
4- (Methylsulfonyl) -benzene-1-sulfonyl chloride (305 mg, 1.2 mmol) was added to a solution of C0116-1 (242 mg, 1.0 mmol) in pyridine (2.0 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 and washed with saturated NaHCO3. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the crude product as yellow solid, which was purified with column chromatography (CH2Cl2 to CH2C12:CH2OH=50 : 1 ) to give the title compound as a white solid (270 mg, yield: 58%, 1H NMR confirmed, confirmed by 1H NMR and LC/MS (target M+23 = 483) .
c. Preparation of compound C0116M
To the solution of C0016M-2 (270 mg, 0.58 mmol) in 3.0 mL dichloromethane (DCM) was add 0.3 mL CF3COOH and the mixture was kept stirring for 1 hour at room temperature. The mixture was added DCM and washed with saturated sodium carbonate solution. The organic layer was dried and concentrated to get the crude product as yellow gum. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (CH2C12 :CH2OH=100 : 1 to 10 : 1) to obtain the product as yellow solid ( 70 mg, yield: 34%) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.12-8.07 (m, 4H) ; 4.01 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H) ; 3.55 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H) ; 3.11 (s, 3H) ; 3.04-3.00 (m, 2H) ; 2.86-2.79 (m, 2H) ; 2.35-2.28 (m, 2H) ; 1.63-1.60 (m, 2H) ; calcd for Ci4H20N2O5S2 (m/z) : 360.45; found: 361.2 [M+l] + .
Preparation of compound C0118M
Figure imgf000193_0001
C0118M-1 C0118M-2 C0118M
a. Preparation of compound C0118M-1
To a solution of N-Boc-piperidin-4-one (420 mg, 2.1mmol) in ethanol (4 mL) was added compound C0065-3 (500 mg, 4.2 mmol) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (50 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous Na2CO3 (30 mLχ6) . The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, and concentrated to give compound C0118M-1 as yellow oil (600 mg; yield: 95%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0118M-2
4-Acetylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (525 mg, 2.4 mmol) was added to a solution of compound C0118M-1 (600 mg, 2 mmol) in pyridine (2 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane : acetone=3:l) to obtain the title compound as light yellow solid (610 mg; yield: 63.4%) .
c. Preparation of compound C0118M
To the solution of compound C0118M-2 (610 mg, 1.26 mmol) in 10 mL dichloromethane (DCM) was added 0.5 mL CF3COOH and the mixture was stirred for 1 hour at room temperature. Then DCM (30 mL) was added to the mixture, and the resulting mixture washed with saturated sodium carbonate solution (30 mLχ3) . The organic layer was dried and concentrated to get the crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (CH2CI2ICH3CH2OH=IO:! to CH3OH) to obtain the title compound as light yellow solid (60 mg; yield: 12.5%) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.07 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H); 7.96 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H); 4.27-4.21 (m, IH); 3.73 (dd, J = 8.4, 5.6 Hz, IH); 3.08 (t, J = 8.8 Hz, IH); 3.04-2.94 (m, 2H), 2.83 (t, J = 11.6 Hz, 2H); 2.66 (s, 3H); 2.46 (d, J = 5.6 Hz, 2H); 2.41 (dd, J = 12.4, 5.2 Hz, IH); 2.26 (s, 6H); 2.20 (dd, J = 12.8, 4.8 Hz, IH); 1.78 (d, J = 13.2 Hz, IH); 1.45 (d, J = 12.8 Hz, IH); LCMS (ESI) calcd for C18H27N3O4S (m/z) : 381.49; found:382.4 [M+l]+. Preparation of compound C0119M
Figure imgf000195_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0119M-1
N-Boc-piperidin-4-one (797 mg, 4.0 mmol) was added to a solution of compound C0084M-2 (617 mg, 4.0 mmol) in methanol (15 mL) . The mixture was stirred at 700C overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography (CH2Cl2ICH3OH =8:1) to obtain the title compound as white solid (300 mg; yield: 22.4%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0119M-2
4-Acetyl-benzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (149 mg, 0.68 mmol) and triethylamine (1 mL) was added to a solution of compound C0119M-1 (190 mg, 0. mmol ] in chloroform (5 mL) . The mixture was stirred under reflux overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane : acetone=3:l) to obtain the product as white solid (250 mg; yield: 84%) .
c. Preparation of compound C0119M
To the solution of compound C0119M-2 (330 mg, 0.63 mmol) in 3.5 mL dichloromethane (DCM) was add CF3COOH (0.35 mL) and the mixture was kept stirring for 1 hour at room temperature. Then CH3CH2OH/NH3 (20 mL) was added to the reaction mixture. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with dichloromethane (20 mL) and the white solid was precipitated. TLC showed that the solid was CF3COONH4. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography (CH2Cl2:CH3OH=8 : 1 ) to obtain the product as white solid (80 mg; yield: 30%) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) : 8.17 (s, IH); 8.11 (m, 4H); 7.36 (s, IH); 3.78 (dd, J = 8.0, 4.0 Hz, IH); 3.22 - 3.11 (m, 6H); 2.89 (dd, J = 15.2, 4.0 Hz, IH); 2.67 (dd, J = 15.2, 8.0 Hz, IH); 2.56 (s, 3H); 1.89-1.73 (m, 3H); LCMS(ESI) calcd for Ci9H23N5O4S (m/z) : 417.48; found:418.5 [M+l]+.
Preparation of compound C0124M
Figure imgf000196_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0123M
2-Aminoacetamide hydrochloride (I g, 9.09 mmol), 1- (cyclopropylmethyl ) piperidin-4-one (1.4g, 9.09) and triethylamine (1.26 mL, 9.09 mmol) in CH3OH (40 mL) were heated to reflux overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was concentrated to afford the crude product. The crude product was purified via column chromatography (CH2C12:CH3OH=100/1 to 5/1) to afford the final product (1.3 g, Yield: 71%) . b. Preparation of compound C0124M
To a mixture of C0123M (300 mg, 1.44 mmol) in dimethylformamide (15 mL) was added NaH (574 mg, 14.4 mmol) slowly. The mixture was stirred for 1.5 hours. Benzyl chloride (146 mg, 1.15 mmol) was added slowly and the mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) . Water (15 mL) was added slowly to the mixture and the resulting mixture was extracted with dichloromethane . The organic layer was dried, concentrated to afford the impure product. The impure product was purified via column chromatography (CH2Cl2 to CH2C12:CH3COCH3=4/1 to 2/1 to CH2C12:CH3CO=10/1 to CHC13/CH3OH=1/1) to obtain the final product (45 mg, yield: 10%) . The structure was confirmed by 1H NMR & LC-MS (target: M+l=300), purity: 95.3% by HPLC.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : 7.30-7.22 (m, 5H); 4.46 (s, 2H); 3.54 (s, 2H); 2.98 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 2H); 2.29-2.26 (m, 4H); 2.05-20.2 (m, 2H); 1.43-1.40 (d, J = 11.6 Hz, 2H); 0.86-0.83 (m, IH); 0.54-0.49 (m, 2H); 0.10-0.06 (m, 2H) . LCMS (ESI) calcd for C18H25N3O (m/z) : 299.41; found: 300.4 [M+l] + .
Preparation of compound C0125M
Figure imgf000197_0001
2-amιnoacetamιde hydrochloride C0104M-1
Figure imgf000197_0002
A mixture of C0104M-1 (350 mg, 2.13 mmol), 1- (cyclopropylmethyl) piperidin-4-one (326 mg, 2.13 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid(10 mg) in methanol (15 mL) was heated to reflux overnight (about 18 hours) . Thin-layer chromatography suggested the reaction complete. The solvent was removed. The residue was dissolved in DCM and washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3, dried, concentrated to afford the impure product (590 mg, yield: 93%) . 150 mg of the impure product was purified via pre-HPLC to obtain the final product (80 mg, yield: 60%) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.68 (s, IH); 7.37- 7.24 (m, 5H); 3.76 (s, 2H); 3.20 (s, 2H); 3.18 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H); 2.32 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 2.14-2.06 (m, 4H); 1.71 (d, J = 10.0 Hz, 2H); 0.89-0.86 (m, IH); 0.56-0.51 (m, 2H); 0.14-0.10 (m, 2H) . LCMS (ESI) calcd for Ci8H25N3O (m/z) : 299.41; found: 300.5 [M+l] + .
Preparation of compound C0126M
Figure imgf000198_0001
4-(cyclopropylmethyl)
Figure imgf000198_0002
cyclohexanone a. Preparation of compound C0126M-1
A mixture of 4- (cyclopropylmethyl) - cyclohexanone (I g, 6.5 mmol) and ethanolamine (4 mL, 65 mmol) in CH3CH2OH (20 mL) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The mixture was concentrated to remove the solvent. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and washed with saturated aqueous of Na2CO3, dried, and concentrated to afford the final product without any purification (1.06 g, Yield: 84%) . The product's identity was confirmed by 1H NMR and MS (target M+l=197) . b. Preparation of compound C0126M A mixture of C0126M-1 (122 mg, 0.63 mmol) and 4- (methyl sulfonyl) benzene-1-sulfonyl chloride
(200 mg, 0.69 mmol) in triethylamine (0.1 mL, 0.69 mmol) and CHCI3 (2.4 mL) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed. The residue was washed with diethyl ether
(3x) and the IN HCl was added to the residue until pH=l . The mixture wad washed with diethyl ether
(2x) . Then IN NaOH was added until a precipitate formed (pH=12) . The solid was filtered and dissolved in CHCI3, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated to afford the final product (28 mg, Yield: 11%) . The structure was confirmed by 1H NMR & MS (target: M+l=415), purity 95.3% by HPLC.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.07 (s, 4H); 3.97
(t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H); 3.55 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H); 3.09
(s, 3H) ; 2.99 (dd, J = 9.2 Hz, 2.4 Hz, 2H) ; 2.51 (td, J = 12.8 Hz, 4 Hz, 2H) ; 2.27-2.19 (m, 4H) ; 1.56 (d, J = 11.6 Hz, 2H) ; 0.87-0.84 (m, IH) ; 0.52-0.48 (m, 2H) ; 0.09-0.07 (m, 2H) . MS (ESI) calcd for C18H26N2O5S2
(m/z) : 414.54; found: 415.3 [M+l]+.
Preparation of compound C0128M
1 p
Figure imgf000199_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0128M-1
Compound C0065-3 (213 mg, 1.8 mmol) was added N- (cyclopropylmethyl) -piperidine-4-one (306 mg, 2.1mmol) in ethanol (2 mL) . The mixture was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product as yellow oil. The crude product was used for next step without any further purification (519 mg; yield: 100%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0128M
To a solution of compound C0128M-1 (456 mg, 1.8 mmol) in pyridine (2 mL) was added 4-acetyl- benzene-1-sulfonyl chloride (473 mg, 2.2 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (100 mL) and washed with saturated sodium carbonate solution (50 mL x 3) . Then the organic layer was dried and concentrated to get the crude product as dark oil (700 mg) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 8.05 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H) ; 7.97 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H) ; 4.26-4.19 (m, IH) ; 3.76 (dd, J = 8.7, 5.6 Hz, IH) ; 3.11 (t, J = 8.8 Hz, IH) ; 2.97 (m, 2H) ; 2.66 (s, 3H) ; 2.61 (dd, J = 12.8, 4.4 Hz, IH) ; 2.45 (dd, J = 5.6, 1.5 Hz, 2H) ; 2.39 (dd, J = 13.0, 4.4 Hz, IH) ; 2.26-2.15 (m, 10H) ; 1.75 (m, IH) ; 1.44-1.37 (m, IH) ; 0.86 (m, IH) ; 0.54-0.45 (m, 2H) ; 0.09 (m, 2H) ; LCMS (ESI) calcd for C22H33N3O4S (m/z) : 435.58; found: 436.4 [M+l]+. Preparation of compound C0129M
Figure imgf000201_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0129M-1
Run 1: To a solution of compound C0084M-2 (617 mg, 4.0 mmol) in methanol (15 mL) was added 1- (cyclopropylmethyl) piperidin-4-one (307 mg, 2.0 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at 700C overnight. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane : methanol=3 : 1 ) to obtain the unknown compound as yellow solid (300 mg) .
Run 2 : To a solution of compound C0084M-2 (309 mg, 2.0 mmol) in methanol (15 mL) was added 1- (cyclopropylmethyl) piperidin-4-one (341 mg, 2.2 mmol) and 4-methylbenzenesulfonic acid monohydrate (12 mg, 0.06 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Then the reaction was refluxed for 7 hours. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane: methanol=3 : 1 ) to obtain the unknown compound as yellow solid (120 mg) . Preparation of compound C0133M
Figure imgf000202_0001
Prepared using methods discussed elsewhere herein .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.80 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 2H) ; 6.95 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H) ; 3.93 (t, J = 5.6 Hz, 2H) ; 3.86 (s, 3H) ; 3.48 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H) ; 2.74 (m, 3H) ; 2.47-2.43 (m, 2H) ; 2.37-2.31 (m, 2H) ; 1.59 (d, J = 11.6 Hz, 2H) ; 1.01 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 6H) ; MS (ESI) calcd for C17H26N2O4S (m/z) : 354.16; found: 355.2 [M+l] +.
Preparation of compound C00134M
Figure imgf000202_0002
1 -(cyclopropylmethyl) piperidin-4-one C0134M-1 C0134M
a. Preparation of compound C0134M A mixture of C0134M-1 (2.1 g, 10.7 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (2.2 g, 11.8 mol) in triethylamine (1.64 mL, 11.8 mmol) and CHCl3 (40 mL) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The mixture was washed with NaHCO3, and the organic layer was concentrated to afford the crude product. The crude product was purified via column chromatography (CH2Cl2 : CH3COCH3=100/1 to 1/1) to obtain the impure product as 2 samples. (210 mg, HPLC: 93%, yield: 6 %; 400 mg, HPLC: 83% yield: 11 %) . The impure product was further purified via preparative HPLC to obtain the final product (130 mg, yield: 3.7 %) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.77 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2H) ; 7.30 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2H) ; 3.94 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 3.52 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 2.98 (m, 2H) ; 2.54 (td, J = 13.2, 4.8 Hz, 2H) ; 2.42 (s, 3H) ; 2.27-2.21 (m, 4H) ; 1.58 (d, J = 11.2 Hz, 2H) ; 0.89-0.84 (m, IH) ; 0.53-0.49 (m, 2H) ; 0.10-0.04 (m, 2H) . MS (ESI) calcd for Ci8H26N2O3S (m/z) : 350.48; found: 351.2 [M+l] +.
Preparation of compound C0135M
Figure imgf000203_0001
A mixture of compound C0126M—1 (378 mg, 1.92 mmol) and 4-ethylbenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (433 mg, 2.12 mmol) in triethylamine (0.3 mL, 2.12 mmol) and CHCl3 (7.6 mL) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. The solvent was removed. The residue was dried to afford the impure product (630 mg) . 360 mg of the impure product was purified via preparative thin-layer chromatography (ethyl acetate : ethanol=10/l ) to afford the final product (25 mg, yield: 6 %) .
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.79 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H); 7.31 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H); 3.94 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 3.52 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) ; 3.00 (d, J = 10.4 Hz, 2H) ; 2.70 (q, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H) ; 2.56 (td, J = 13.6, 4.4 Hz, 2H) ; 2.28-2.21 (m, 4H) ; 1.59 (d, J = 11.6 Hz, 2H) ; 1.26 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, 3H) ; 0.91-0.83 (m, IH) ; 0.52-0.50 (m, 2H) ; 0.10-0.05 (m, 2H) . MS (ESI) calcd for C19H28N2O3S (m/z) : 364.5; found: 365.2 [M+l] + .
Preparation of compound C0136
Figure imgf000204_0001
2-amιnoacetamιde hydrochloride
Figure imgf000204_0003
Figure imgf000204_0002
a. Preparation of compound C0136-1
Triethylamine (0.73 mL, 5.25 mmol) was added to the suspension of 2-aminoacetamide hydrochloride (553 mg, 5.0 mmol) in 10 mL of methanol at room temperature. Then, 2-tetralone (730 mg, 5.0 mmol) was added dropwise and the resulting mixture stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. NaBH4 (345 mg, 7.5 mmol) was added and stirred for 2 hours. After 2 hours, a white solid was removed via filtration and the filtrate was concentrated. Then 10 mL of water were added and the solution was extracted with ethyl acetate (EA) (20 mL x 3 ) . The organic phase was collected and dried over Na2SO4. The Na2SO4 was removed and ethyl acetate was removed via evaporation. 0.5 M HCl was added to the ether phase until the aqueous layer was pH=3. The aqueous phase was extracted with ether. Then 0.5 M NaOH was added to the aqueous phase until pH = 8 and the aqueous phase was then extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was collected and dried over Na2SO4. The Na2SO4 was removed and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to obtain the title product as purple solid (530 mg, yield: 52%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0136M-2
1.53 g of piperidin-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate was added in 50 mL of CHCI3 and 4.2 mL of triethylamine was added. The mixture was heated to reflux for 0.5 hour. Then 1.28 mL of benzenesulfonyl chloride was added and the mixture was stirred at 700C for 4 hours. The solution was diluted with 50 mL of CHCI3 and washed water (50 mL χ3) and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to dryness to obtain the title product as white solid. (1.76 g, yield: 74%) .
c. Preparation of compound C0136M Compound C0136M-2 (251 mg, 1.05 mmol) was dissolved in isopropyl alcohol (10 mL) and C0136M—1
(204 mg, 1.00 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at reflux for 3 days. The precipitate that formed was filtered and purified by column chromatography with CH2Cl2 : CH3OH=50 : 1 to 30:1 to obtain the title product as white solid (60 mg, yield: 13.4%) . The structure was confirmed by 1H NMR and LC-MS, Purity: 95.7% by HPLC, shown as follows:
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.76-7.69 (m, 3H); 7.54-7.51 (m, 3H); 7.15-7.05 (m, 3H); 3.88 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 2H); 3.37 (s, 2H); 3.10-3.09 (m, IH); 2.91 - 2.85(m, 3H); 2.77-2.72 (m, IH); 2.42 (t, J = 13.2 Hz, 2H); 2.12-2.03 (m, 2H); 1.92-1.89 (m, 1 H); 1.81-1.78 (m, IH) ; 1.68-1.56 (m, 2H) ; calcd for C23H27N3O3S (m/z; 425.18; found: 426.4 [M+l] +.
Preparation of compound C0137M
Figure imgf000206_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0137M-1
Piperidin-4-one hydrochloride monohydrate (2.9 g) was added in 50 mL of acetonitrile and then 7.53 g of K2CO3 and 4.28 g of bromocyclohexane was added. The mixture was heated to reflux overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 and washed with water (3x) and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to dryness to obtain 300 mg of the crude product as yellow solid (yield: 6%) . The residue was washed with 40 mL of diethyl ether and filtered to obtain 150 mg of yellow solid (yield: 3%) . The diethyl ether, which was used to wash the residue, was evaporated and 150 mg of yellow oil was obtained (yield: 3%)
b. Preparation of compound C0137M
A solution of C0137M-1 (150 mg, 0.83 mmol,), C0104M-1 (272 mg, 1.66 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (8 mg, 0.0415 mmol) in CH3OH (4 mL) was heated to reflux overnight (about 18 hours) . The reaction solution was cooled to room temperature and the white solid was filtered and washed with CH3OH dried in vacuo to obtain 55 mg of the impure product as white solid. The impure product was purified by preparative-HPLC to obtain the title product as white solid (13 mg, yield: 4.8%) . The structure was confirmed by 1H NMR & LC-MS, (target M+l =328), purity: 98.8%.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.35 - 7.29 (m, 5H); 6.92 (s, IH); 3.75 (s, 2H); 3.20 (s, 2H); 3.00 (d, J = 11.2 Hz, 2H); 2.30 (m, 3H), 2.04 (dt, J = 12.4, 4.0 Hz, 2H), 1.86 - 1.78 (m, 4H), 1.71 (d, J = 11.4, 2H), 1.20 (m, 6H); MS (ESI) calcd for C20H29N3O (m/z) :327.46; found: 328.4 [M+l]+.
Preparation of compound C0141M-2
pιpe
Figure imgf000207_0001
C0141 M-1 C0141 M-2 a. Preparation of compound C0141M-1
Piperidin-4-one (0.5 g) was dissolved in 25 mL of CHCl3 and 1.4 mL of triethylamine was added. Then 915 mg of thiophene-2-sulfonyl chloride was added and the mixture was stirred at 700C overnight (about 18 hours) . The solution was diluted with 50 mL of CHCl3 and washed 0.1 M HCl (aq, 50 mL χ3) and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to obtain the title product as yellow solid (1.025 g, yield: 83.7%) . b. Preparation of compound C0141M-2
The solution of C0141M-1 (1.02 g, 4.18 mmol), 2-aminoethanol (4.8 mL, 83.6 mmol), and p-toluenesulfonic acid-monohydrate (24 mg, 0.125 mmol) in ethanol (30 ml) was stirred at room temperature for 2 days. The reaction solution was evaporated and the residue was dissolved in CHCl3 and washed with sat. NaHCO3 (aq) for (6x) and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to obtain the title product as yellow oil. (1.175 g, yield: 98%) . The structure was confirmed by MS (target M+l =289) and 1H NMR.
Preparation of compound C0142
ethyl
Figure imgf000208_0001
C0142M-2 a. Preparation of compound C0142M-1
Ethyl 3-aminopropanoate hydrochloride (5 g) was added to 50 mL of saturated NH4OH (aq) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Then the mixture was washed with CH2C12:CH3OH=10 :1 (6x) . The resulting water layer was evaporated to obtain the title product as white solid (4.5 g; yield: 98%) . The structure was confirmed by H NMR and LC-MS (target M+l = 89)
b. Preparation of compound C0142M-2
Piperidin-4-one (250 mg) was dissolved in 15 mL of CHCI3 and 0.7 mL of triethylamine was added. Then 522 mg of 4-methoxybenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride was added and the mixture was stirred at 700C overnight. The solution was diluted with 30 mL of CHCl3 and washed with 0.1 M HCl (aq, 30 mL x 3) and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to obtain the title product as yellow solid (580 mg, yield: 85.4%)
c. Preparation of compound C0142M
The solution of C0142M-1 (540 mg, 2 mmol) and C0142M-2 (352 mg, 4 mmol) in CH3OH (10 ml) was heated to reflux overnight. The reaction solution was cooled to RT and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography eluted with CH2C12:CH3OH=50:1 to 10:1 to obtain the title product as white solid (32 mg, yield: 5%) . The structure was confirmed by NMR & LC-MS (target M+l =340), purity: 98.2% by HPLC.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : 7.70 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H); 7.01 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H); 6.10 (s, IH); 3.89 (s, 3H); 3.46 (d, J = 11.6 Hz, 2H); 2.99 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 2.80 (t, J = 9.8 Hz, 2H); 2.28 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H); 1.87 - 1.78 (m, 4H); MS (ESI) calcd for C15H21N3O4S (m/z) : 339.13; found: 340.4 [M+l] + .
Preparation of compound C0143M
Figure imgf000209_0001
piperidin-4-one
C0143M-1 C0143M-2 a. Preparation of compound C0143M-1
8-Quinolinesulfonyl chloride (1.1 g, 4.8 mmol) and triethylamine (808 mg, 8 mmol) was added to a solution of piperidin-4-one (400 mg, 4 mmol) in CHCI3 (20 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was diluted with CHCI3, and washed with H2O (10 mL x 3) and 0. IN HCl (10 mL x 3), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the title product as yellow solid (1.01 g, yield: 87%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0143M-2 p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (20 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (2.13 g, 35 mmol) was added to a solution of compound C0143M-1 (1.01 g, 3.5 mmol) in ethanol (30 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to dryness; the residue was diluted with dichloromethane, washed with saturated Na2CO3, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to give the crude product as yellow solid (783 mg, yield: 67.2%) .
Preparation of compound C0144M-2
Figure imgf000210_0001
octahydroquinolm
-4(1 H)-one C0144M-1 C0144M-2 a. Preparation of compound C0144M-1
4-Methoxybenzenesulfonyl chloride (453 mg, 2.2 mmol) and triethylamine (404 mg, 4 mmol) were added to a solution of octahydroquinolin-4 ( IH) -one (306 mg, 2 mmol) in CHCl3 (15 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was diluted with CHCl3, and washed with H2O (10 mL x 3) and 0. IN HCl (10 mL x 3), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the title product as yellow oil (612 mg, yield: 95%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0144M-2 p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (10 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (1.15 g, 18.9 mmol) were added to a solution of compound C0144M-1 (612 mg, 1.89 mmol) in ethanol (20 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to dryness, the residue was diluted with dichloromethane, washed with saturated Na2CO3, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to give the crude product as yellow gum (556 mg, yield: 80.4%) .
Preparation of compound C0145M
Figure imgf000211_0001
N-Boc-peperidone C0145M.! C0145M-2 C0145M-3 a. Preparation of compound C0145M-1
A solution of N-Boc-piperidin-4-one (500 mg, 2.67 mmol) and 2-aminoethanol (0.55 mL, 9.34 mmol) in ethanol (4 mL) was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (50 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous Na2CO3 (30 mL x 6) . The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, then concentrated to give target product as yellow oil (614 mg; yield: 95%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0145M-2
4-Methoxybenzene-l-sulfonyl chloride (626 mg, 3.04 mmol) and triethylamine (0.7 mL) were added to a solution of compound C0145M-1 (614 mg, 2.53 mmol) in chloroform (5 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography (petroleum ether: dichloromethane =1:1) to obtain target product as white solid (500 mg; yield: 48%) .
c. Preparation of compound C0145M-3
CF3COOH (0.6 mL) was added to the solution of compound C0145M-2 (500 mg, 1.21 mmol) in 6 mL dichloromethane and the mixture was kept stirring for 0.5 hour at room temperature. Then CH3CH2OH/NH3 (20 mL) was added to the reaction mixture. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with dichloromethane (20 mL) and the white solid was precipitated. TLC showed that the solid was CF3COONH4. Then the mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography (CH2Cl2 : CH3OH=IO : 1 ) to obtain the product as yellow solid (290 mg; yield: 76%) . Preparation of compound C0149M-2
Figure imgf000213_0001
C0149M-1 C0149M-2
a. Preparation of compound C0149M-1
4-Phenoxybenzenesulfonyl chloride (500 mg, 1.86 mmol) and triethylamine (404 mg, 4 mmol) were added to a solution of piperidin-4-one (202 mg, 2.05 mmol) in CHCl3 (7 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was diluted with CHCl3, and washed with H2O (10 mL x 3) and 0.1 N HCl (10 mL x 3), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give 417 mg of the title product (67.8% yield) .
b. Preparation of compound C0149M-2
To a solution of C0149M-1 (417 mg, 1.26 mmol) in ethanol (15 mL) was added p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (10 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (769 mg, 12.6 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to dryness, the residue was diluted with CH2Cl2, washed with saturated Na2CO3, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to give the crude product as white solid (434 mg, yield: 92.3%) . Preparation of compound C0150M-2
Figure imgf000214_0001
a. Preparation of compound C0150M-1
A solution of piperidin-4-one (47 mg, 0.47 mmol) in chloroform (3 mL) was treated with l-benzothiophene-3-sulfonyl chloride (100 mg, 0.43 mmol) and triethylamine (0.12 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Then, the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted in dichloromethane (30 mL) . The solution was washed by 0.1 N HCl (30 mL x 2) and brine. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to obtain target product as light yellow solid (120 mg; yield: 94%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0150M-2
A solution of C0150M-1 (217 mg, 0.74 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) was treated with p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (6 mg) and 2-aminoethanol (452 mg, 7.4 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 hours. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to dryness, the residue was diluted with dichloromethane, washed with saturated Na2CO3, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to give the crude product as light yellow solid (228 mg, yield: 91.2%) Preparation of compound C0151M-2
Figure imgf000215_0001
pipeπdin-4-one C0151 M-1
Figure imgf000215_0002
a. Preparation of compound C0151M-1
A mixture of piperidin-4-one (643 mg, 6.5 mmol) and l-isocyanato-4-methoxybenzene (500 mg, 3.4 mmol) and K2CO3 (1.1 g, 8.0 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (20 mL) was stirred overnight (about 18 hours) at room temperature. To the reaction mixture was added 5 mL water and the water phase was extracted with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layer was washed with 1 N HCl and brine, dried, and concentrated to obtain the product (800 mg, yield: 96%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0151M-2
To a solution of C0151M-1 (0.5 g, 2.0 mmol) in ethanol (5.0 mL) was added ethanolamine (0.4 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. Then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 and washed with saturated aqueous Na2CO3. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, and concentrated to obtain the title product as white solid (530 mg, yield: 90%) . Preparation of compound C0152M-4
Figure imgf000216_0001
aniline C0152M-1 C0152M-2
Figure imgf000216_0002
a. Preparation of compound C0152M-1
A mixture of aniline (5 g, 53.8 mmol), 3-bromopropanoic acid (8.2 g, 53.8 mmol), triethylamine (10.8 g, 107.6 mmol), sodium iodide (0.05 g) , and tetrahydrofuran (50 mL) was stirred at reflux overnight (about 18 hours) . The reaction mixture was cooled down and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with dichloromethane (DCM) (100 mL) and washed with water once. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography (CH2Cl2: CH3OH: CH3COOH = 200: 1 : 1) to obtain compound C0152M-1 as brown oil (3 g; yield: 33%)
b. Preparation of compound C0152M-2 Compound C0152M-1 (1.5 g, 9 mmol) and polyphosphosphoric acid (1.5 g) were heated at 100 0C for 1 hour. After cooling to 0 0C, ice-water was added into the reaction mixture. The aqueous phase was neutralized to pH 7 with saturated aqueous KHCO3 at 0 0C and basified to pH 12 with saturated aqueous K2CO3. The aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane (150 mL x 4) . The organic layer were dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered, and evaporated under reduced pressure to give a crude product which was purified by column chromatography (petroleum ether : ethyl acetate =5:1) to give product as yellow oil (94 mg; yield: 7.1%)
c. Preparation of compound C0152M-3
To a solution of compound C0152M-2 (160 mg, 1.08 mmol) in pyridine (5 mL) was added 4-methoxy- benzene-1-sulfonyl chloride (159 mg, 0.77 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted in dichloromethane (30 mL) . The solution was washed by 0.1 N HCl (30 mL x 3) and brine. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to obtain the crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (petroleum ether : ethyl acetate =5:1) to obtain the title product as white solid (130 mg; yield: 64%)
d. Preparation of compound C0152M-4
To a solution of C0152M-3 (170 mg, 0.536 mmol) and 2-aminoethanol (327 mg, 5.36 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) was add 4-methylbenzenesulfonic acid monohydrate (3 mg, 0.016 mmol) . The reaction was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (50 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous Na2CO3 (30 ml x 6) . The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, then concentrated to give compound C0152M-4 as yellow solid (175 mg; yield: 90%)
Preparation of compound C0153M
terf-buty
Figure imgf000218_0001
l 3-oxopιperιdιne -1-carboxylate C0153M-1 CQ153M-2
Figure imgf000218_0002
-3 a. Preparation of compound C0153M-1 t-Butyl-3-oxopiperidine-1-carboxylate (560 mg, 2.8 mmol) and 2-aminoethanol (599 mg, 9.8 mmol) in ethanol (4 mL) were stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The reaction solution was evaporated and the residue was dissolved in dichloromethane and washed with saturated Na2CO3 (aq) (6x) and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to obtain the title product as yellow oil (640 mg, yield: 94%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0153M-2
233 mg of C0153M—1 was dissolved in 1 mL of pyridine. A solution of 222 mg of 4-hydroxybenzene- 1-sulfonyl chloride in 0.5 mL of pyridine was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . Preparation of compound C0153M-6
Figure imgf000219_0001
tert-butyl 3-oxop,perid,ne C0153M"4 C0153M"5 C01 53M"6
-1-carboxylate a. Preparation of compound C0153M-4
A solution of tert-butyl 3-oxopiperidine-l- carboxylate (500 mg, 2.51 mmol) in HC1/CH3OH (12.5 mL) was heated to reflux for 0.5 hours. The solution was cooled to room temperature and evaporated to dryness to obtain the HCl salt of the title compound as yellow solid (330 mg, yield: 97%) .
b. Preparation of compound C0153M-5
Piperidin-3-one hydrochloride (330 mg) was added to 10 mL of acetonitrile . Then, 1.38 g of K2CO3 and 855 mg of bromobenzene were added to the solution. The mixture was heated at reflux overnight (about 18 hours) . The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography eluted with dichloromethane :methanol=30 : 1 to obtain the title product as yellow oil (260 mg, yield: 58.3%) .
c. Preparation of compound C0153M-6
The solution of C0153M-5 (250 mg, 1.32 mmol), 2-aminoethanol (282 mg, 4.62 mmol) in CH3CH2OH (3 mL) was stirred at room temperature overnight (about 18 hours) . The reaction solution was evaporated to dryness and the residue was dissolved in dichloromethane and washed with saturated Na2CO3 (aq) (6x) and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to dryness to obtain the title product as a yellow oil (301 mg, yield: 98%) .
Each of the patents, patent applications and articles cited herein is incorporated by reference. The use of the article "a" or "an" is intended to include one or more.
The foregoing description and the examples are intended as illustrative and are not to be taken as limiting. Still other variations within the spirit and scope of this invention are possible and will readily present themselves to those skilled in the art .

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED:
1. A compound that corresponds in structure to Formula A or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
Figure imgf000221_0001
wherein
G, P and W are selected from the group consisting of NR20, NR2, NR7, CH2, S and 0, where R7 and R2 are the same or different and are H, C (H) v(D)h where each of v and h is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and v+h = 3, C (H) q (D) r-aliphatic C]_-C]_]_ hydrocarbyl where each of q and r is 0, 1, or 2 and q+r = 0, 1 or 2, aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl sulfonyl or aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarboyl, and R20 is X—circle A—R-L as defined hereinafter, with the provisos that i) only one of G, P and W is NR20, ii) one of G, P and W must be NR20, and iii) P is NR2 when other than NR20; X is SO2, C(O), CH2, CD2, OC(O), NHC(NH) or NHC(O) ;
Q is CHR9 or C(O) ; Z is CHR10 or C(O) ; each of d, e, f and k is either zero or one and the sum of (d + e + f + k) = 2, e is zero when d is zero, and k is zero when f is zero;
D and F are the same or different and are CH or CD;
E and K are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2; each of m and n is zero or one and the sum of m+n is 1 or 2; circle A is an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system containing one ring or two fused rings;
Rl represents up to three substituent groups that themselves are the same or different, Rla, Rlb, and Rlc, wherein each of those three groups, Rla-c^ j_s separately selected from the group consisting of H, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxy, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxycarbonyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C\-Cη hydrocarboyl, hydroxy-, trifluoromethyl- or halogen- substituted C]_-C7 hydrocarboyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbylsulfonyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxysulfonyl, halogen, nitro, phenyl, cyano, carboxyl, C\-Cη hydrocarbyl carboxylate, carboxamide or sulfonamide wherein the amido nitrogen in either group has the formula NR^R4 wherein R^ and R^ are the same or different and are H, C1-C4 hydrocarbyl, or R^ and R^ together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7- membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, MAr, where M is -CH2-,
-0- or -N=N- and Ar is a single-ringed aryl or heteroaryl group, and NR^R6 wherein R^ and R^ are the same or different and are H, C1-C4 hydrocarbyl, C1-C4 acyl, C]_-C4 hydrocarbylsulfonyl, or R^ and R^ together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7- membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur;
R8, R9, and R10 are each H, or two of R8, R9, and R^-O are H and one is a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl group that is unsubstituted or is substituted with up to three atoms that are the same or different and are oxygen or nitrogen atoms;
R11, R12, R13 and R14 are all H, or R11 and R13 are H and R12 and R14 are H or D, or one of the pair R11 and R12 or the pair R13 and R14 together with the depicted ring form a saturated or unsaturated 6-membered ring, and the other pair are each H or they are H and D as recited herein.
2. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to a formula selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000223_0001
Figure imgf000224_0001
3. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1 that corresponds in structure to Formula B
Figure imgf000224_0002
wherein
G and W are selected from the group consisting of NR20, NR7, CH2, S and 0, where R2 and
R7 are the same or different and are H, C(H)V(D)J1 where each of v and h is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and v+h = 3, C (H) q (D) r-aliphatic C]_-C]_]_ hydrocarbyl where each of q and r is 0, 1, or 2 and q+r = 0, 1 or 2, aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl sulfonyl or aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarboyl, and R2^ is X-circle A-R^, with the provisos that only one of G and W is NR2^ and that one of G and W must be NR20.
4. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 3, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to Formula I
Figure imgf000225_0001
wherein D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2.
5. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 4, wherein X is C(O) , CH2, CD2, or SO2.
6. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 4, wherein W is
NR7, CH2, S or 0.
7. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 4, wherein circle A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl ( 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, 1, 2, 4-triazinyl and
1 , 2 , 3-triazinyl ) , furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, naphthyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, quinazolyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, and benzopyrimidinyl .
8. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 4, wherein one of Q and Z is C(O) and the other is CH2.
9. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 4, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to a formula selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000226_0001
Figure imgf000226_0002
Figure imgf000227_0001
10. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 3, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to Formula II
Figure imgf000227_0002
wherein D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2.
11. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 10, wherein X is C(O) , CH2, CD2, or SO2.
12. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 10, wherein W is
NR7, CH2, S or 0.
13. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 10, wherein circle A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl ( 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, 1, 2, 4-triazinyl and
1 , 2 , 3-triazinyl ) , furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, naphthyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, quinazolyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, and benzopyrimidinyl .
14. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 10, wherein one of Q and Z is C(O) and the other is CH2.
15. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 10, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to a formula selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000228_0001
Figure imgf000229_0001
Figure imgf000230_0001
16. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 3, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to Formula III
Figure imgf000230_0002
wherein D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2, and each of m and n is one.
17. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 16, wherein X is C(O) , CH2, CD2, or SO2.
18. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 16, wherein W is
NR7, CH2, S or 0.
19. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 16, wherein circle A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl ( 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, 1, 2, 4-triazinyl and
1, 2, 3-triazinyl) , furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, naphthyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, quinazolyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, and benzopyrimidinyl .
20. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 16, wherein one of Q and Z is C(O) and the other is CH2.
21. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 16, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to a formula selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000232_0001
22. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1 that corresponds in structure to Formula C
Figure imgf000232_0002
wherein G and W are selected from the group consisting of NR2, NR7, CH2, S and 0, where R2 and R7 are the same or different and are H, C (H) v (D) ^ where each of v and h is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and v+h = 3,
C (H) q (D) r-aliphatic C]_-C]_]_ hydrocarbyl where each of q and r is 0, 1, or 2 and q+r = 0, 1 or 2, aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl sulfonyl or aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarboyl, with the proviso that that one of G and W must be NR2 or NR7.
23. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 22, wherein e and g are both zero.
24. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 23, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to Formula IV
Figure imgf000233_0001
wherein D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2.
25. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 24, wherein X is C(O) , CH2, CD2, or SO2.
26. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 24, wherein W is
NR7, CH2, S or 0.
27. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 24, wherein circle A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl ( 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, 1, 2, 4-triazinyl and
1, 2, 3-triazinyl) , furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, naphthyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, quinazolyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, and benzopyrimidinyl .
28. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 24, wherein one of Q and Z is C(O) and the other is CH2.
29. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 24, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to a formula:
Figure imgf000235_0001
30. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 23, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to Formula V
R2
Figure imgf000235_0002
wherein D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2.
31. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 30, wherein X is C(O) , CH2, CD2, or SO2.
32. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 30, wherein W is
NR7, CH2, S or 0.
33. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 30, wherein circle A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl ( 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, 1, 2, 4-triazinyl and
1 , 2 , 3-triazinyl ) , furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, naphthyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, quinazolyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, and benzopyrimidinyl .
34. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 30, wherein one of Q and Z is C(O) and the other is CH2.
35. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 30, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to a formula:
Figure imgf000236_0001
Figure imgf000237_0001
and
Figure imgf000237_0002
Figure imgf000237_0003
36. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 23, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to Formula VI
Figure imgf000238_0001
wherein D and F are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2, and each of m and n is one.
37. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 36, wherein X is C(O) , CH2, CD2, or SO2.
38. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 36, wherein W is
NR7, CH2, S or 0.
39. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 39, wherein circle A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl ( 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, 1, 2, 4-triazinyl and
1 , 2 , 3-triazinyl ) , furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, naphthyl, benzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, quinazolyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, and benzopyrimidinyl .
40. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 36, wherein one of Q and Z is C(O) and the other is CH2.
41. The compound or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 36, wherein said compound corresponds in structure to a formula:
Figure imgf000239_0001
Figure imgf000239_0002
42. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an analgesic effective amount of a compound of claim 1 dissolved or dispersed in a physiologically tolerable carrier.
43. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an analgesic effective amount of a compound of claim 2 dissolved or dispersed in a physiologically tolerable carrier.
44. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an analgesic effective amount of a compound of claim 22 dissolved or dispersed in a physiologically tolerable carrier
45. A method of reducing one or both of inflammation and pain in a host mammal in need thereof that comprises administering to that host mammal a pharmaceutical composition containing an analgesic effective amount of a compound of Formula A or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof dissolved or dispersed in a physiologically tolerable carrier
Figure imgf000240_0001
wherein
G, P and W are selected from the group consisting of NR20, NR2, NR7, CH2, S and 0, where R7 and R2 are the same or different and are H, C (H) v (D) ^1 where each of v and h is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and v+h = 3, C (H) q (D) r-aliphatic C]_-C]_]_ hydrocarbyl where each of q and r is 0, 1, or 2 and q+r = 0, 1 or 2, aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarbyl sulfonyl or aliphatic C]_-C]_2 hydrocarboyl, and R20 is X-circle A-R^ as defined hereinafter, with the provisos that i) only one of G, P and W is NR20, ii) one of G, P and W must be NR20, and iii) P is NR2 when other than NR20;
X is SO2, C(O), CH2, CD2, OC(O), NHC(NH) or NHC(O) ;
Q is CHR9 or C(O) ;
Z is CHR10 or C(O) ; each of d, e, f and k is either zero or one and the sum of (d + e + f + k) = 2, e is zero when d is zero, and k is zero when f is zero;
D and F are the same or different and are CH or CD;
E and K are the same or different and are CH2, CHD or CD2; each of m and n is zero or one and the sum of m+n is 1 or 2; circle A is an aromatic or heteroaromatic ring system containing one ring or two fused rings;
Rl represents up to three substituent groups that themselves are the same or different, Rla, Rlb, and Rlc, wherein each of those three groups,
R^-a~c, is separately selected from the group consisting of H, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxy, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxycarbonyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-C7 hydrocarboyl, hydroxy-, trifluoromethyl- or halogen- substituted C]_-C7 hydrocarboyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbylsulfonyl, C]_-Cg hydrocarbyloxysulfonyl, halogen, nitro, phenyl, cyano, carboxyl, C-^-Cη hydrocarbyl carboxylate, carboxamide or sulfonamide wherein the amido nitrogen in either group has the formula NR3R4 wherein R3 and R4 are the same or different and are H, C1-C4 hydrocarbyl, or R3 and R4 together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7- membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, MAr, where M is -CH2-, -
0- or -N=N- and Ar is a single-ringed aryl or heteroaryl group, and NR^R6 wherein R^ and R^ are the same or different and are H, C1-C4 hydrocarbyl, C1-C4 acyl, C]_-C4 hydrocarbylsulfonyl, or R^ and R^ together with the depicted nitrogen form a 5-7- membered ring that optionally contains 1 or 2 additional hetero atoms that independently are nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur;
R8, R9, and R10 are each H, or two of R8, R9, and R^-O are H and one is a C]_-Cg hydrocarbyl group that is unsubstituted or is substituted with up to three atoms that are the same or different and are oxygen or nitrogen atoms;
R11, R12, R13 and R14 are all H, or R11 and R13 are H and R12 and R14 are H or D, or one of the pair R11 and R12 or the pair R13 and R14 together with the depicted ring form a saturated or unsaturated 6-membered ring, and the other pair are each H or they are H and D as recited herein.
46. The method according to claim 45, wherein said host mammal is selected from the group consisting of a primate, a laboratory rodent, a companion animal, and a food animal.
47. The method according to claim 45, wherein said composition is administered a plurality of times over a period of days.
48. The method according to claim 45, wherein said composition is administered a plurality of times in one day.
49. The method according to claim 45, wherein said composition is administered perorally.
50. The method according to claim 45, wherein said composition is administered parenterally .
PCT/US2009/062860 2008-10-31 2009-10-30 Filamin a binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic WO2010051497A1 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2009308702A AU2009308702B2 (en) 2008-10-31 2009-10-30 Filamin A binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic
CA2779261A CA2779261C (en) 2008-10-31 2009-10-30 Filamin a binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic
ES09824197.9T ES2610231T3 (en) 2008-10-31 2009-10-30 Filamina an anti-inflammatory and analgesic bonding
EP09824197.9A EP2488177B1 (en) 2008-10-31 2009-10-30 Filamin a binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic
IL219464A IL219464A (en) 2008-10-31 2012-04-29 Filamin a binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/263,257 US8722851B2 (en) 2007-11-02 2008-10-31 Analgesia with minimal tolerance and dependence by a mu opioid receptor agonist that also binds filamin A
US12/263,257 2008-10-31
US12/435,284 US20100279996A1 (en) 2009-05-04 2009-05-04 Novel analgesic that binds filamin a
US12/435,284 2009-05-04
US12/610,091 US8653068B2 (en) 2009-10-30 2009-10-30 Filamin A binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic
US12/610,091 2009-10-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2010051497A1 true WO2010051497A1 (en) 2010-05-06

Family

ID=42129311

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2009/062860 WO2010051497A1 (en) 2008-10-31 2009-10-30 Filamin a binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP2488177B1 (en)
AU (1) AU2009308702B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2779261C (en)
IL (1) IL219464A (en)
WO (1) WO2010051497A1 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8598164B2 (en) 2010-05-06 2013-12-03 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Heterocyclic chromene-spirocyclic piperidine amides as modulators of ion channels
US8828996B2 (en) 2011-03-14 2014-09-09 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Morpholine-spirocyclic piperidine amides as modulators of ion channels
US8916565B2 (en) 2011-02-02 2014-12-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Pyrrolopyrazine-spirocyclic piperidine amides as modulators of ion channels
EP3054956A4 (en) * 2013-10-08 2017-09-20 Pain Therapeutics, Inc. Method for inhibiting growth of cancer cells
US10385070B2 (en) 2011-02-18 2019-08-20 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Chroman-spirocyclic piperidine amides as modulators of ion channels
US10479797B2 (en) 2016-06-06 2019-11-19 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of the beta-3 adrenergic receptor useful for the treatment or prevention of disorders related thereto
US10760052B2 (en) * 2012-07-13 2020-09-01 Cassava Science, Inc. Method of inhibiting tau phosphorylation
CN114072406A (en) * 2019-02-21 2022-02-18 佩恩治疗公司 Solid polymorphs of FLNA-binding compounds and their hydrochlorides

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5852029A (en) * 1990-04-10 1998-12-22 Israel Institute For Biological Research Aza spiro compounds acting on the cholinergic system with muscarinic agonist activity
US7049321B2 (en) * 2002-05-03 2006-05-23 Israel Institute For Biological Research Methods and pharmaceutical compositions for treatment of central and peripheral nervous system disorders and compounds useful therefor

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3723442A (en) * 1970-12-31 1973-03-27 Yoshitomi Pharmaceutical 3-oxo-1-oxa-4,8-diazaspiro(4.5)decanes
DE102004014296A1 (en) * 2004-03-22 2005-10-06 Grünenthal GmbH Substituted 1,4,8-triazaspiro [4.5] decan-2-one compounds
DE102004014304A1 (en) * 2004-03-22 2005-10-06 Grünenthal GmbH Substituted 1,4,8-triazaspiro [4,5] decan-2-one compounds
AR057579A1 (en) * 2005-11-23 2007-12-05 Merck & Co Inc SPIROCICLICAL COMPOUNDS AS INHIBITORS OF ACETYLASE HISTONE (HDAC)

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5852029A (en) * 1990-04-10 1998-12-22 Israel Institute For Biological Research Aza spiro compounds acting on the cholinergic system with muscarinic agonist activity
US7049321B2 (en) * 2002-05-03 2006-05-23 Israel Institute For Biological Research Methods and pharmaceutical compositions for treatment of central and peripheral nervous system disorders and compounds useful therefor

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP2488177A4 *

Cited By (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8598164B2 (en) 2010-05-06 2013-12-03 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Heterocyclic chromene-spirocyclic piperidine amides as modulators of ion channels
US9511067B2 (en) 2011-02-02 2016-12-06 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted spiro[piperidine-4,1'-pyrrolo[1,2-a]pyrazine]s as modulators of ion channels
US8916565B2 (en) 2011-02-02 2014-12-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Pyrrolopyrazine-spirocyclic piperidine amides as modulators of ion channels
US10385070B2 (en) 2011-02-18 2019-08-20 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Chroman-spirocyclic piperidine amides as modulators of ion channels
US9181273B2 (en) 2011-03-14 2015-11-10 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Morpholine-spirocyclic piperidine amides as modulators of ion channels
US8828996B2 (en) 2011-03-14 2014-09-09 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Morpholine-spirocyclic piperidine amides as modulators of ion channels
US10760052B2 (en) * 2012-07-13 2020-09-01 Cassava Science, Inc. Method of inhibiting tau phosphorylation
EP3054956A4 (en) * 2013-10-08 2017-09-20 Pain Therapeutics, Inc. Method for inhibiting growth of cancer cells
EP3791875A1 (en) 2013-10-08 2021-03-17 Pain Therapeutics, Inc. Method for inhibiting growth of cancer cells
US10479797B2 (en) 2016-06-06 2019-11-19 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of the beta-3 adrenergic receptor useful for the treatment or prevention of disorders related thereto
US10662200B2 (en) 2016-06-06 2020-05-26 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of the beta-3 adrenergic receptor useful for the treatment or prevention of disorders related thereto
US10927123B2 (en) 2016-06-06 2021-02-23 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of the beta-3 adrenergic receptor useful for the treatment or prevention of disorders related thereto
US11560386B2 (en) 2016-06-06 2023-01-24 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of the beta-3 adrenergic receptor useful for the treatment or prevention of disorders related thereto
CN114072406A (en) * 2019-02-21 2022-02-18 佩恩治疗公司 Solid polymorphs of FLNA-binding compounds and their hydrochlorides

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2488177B1 (en) 2016-10-12
AU2009308702B2 (en) 2015-05-28
AU2009308702A1 (en) 2012-09-20
EP2488177A4 (en) 2013-07-03
IL219464A0 (en) 2012-06-28
EP2488177A1 (en) 2012-08-22
CA2779261C (en) 2015-03-24
IL219464A (en) 2017-05-29
CA2779261A1 (en) 2010-05-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2498600B1 (en) Filamin a-binding anti-inflammatory analgesic
EP2498599B1 (en) Analgesic that binds filamin a
EP2488177B1 (en) Filamin a binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic
US8653068B2 (en) Filamin A binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic
JP6630374B2 (en) Methods to inhibit τ phosphorylation
AU2010317501B2 (en) N1-pyrazolospiroketone acetyl-CoA carboxylase inhibitors
US8614324B2 (en) Filamin A binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic
CZ18296A3 (en) Azaspiro compounds affecting cholinergic system with activity of mucarine antagonist, pharmaceutical preparation in which said compounds are comprised and method of treating diseases of central and peripheral nervous system
WO2011058473A1 (en) N2-pyrazolospiroketone acetyl-coa carboxylase inhibitors
US9340558B2 (en) Filamin a binding anti-inflammatory and analgesic
EP2918587B1 (en) Filamin A binding compounds and their use as anti-inflammatory and analgesic agents
US8580808B2 (en) Filamin A-binding anti-inflammatory analgesic
US8580809B2 (en) Filamin A-binding anti-inflammatory analgesic
US20100280061A1 (en) Novel analgesic that binds filamin a
US20100280057A1 (en) Novel analgesic that binds filamin a
WO2009026227A2 (en) Highly selective sigma receptor ligands

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 09824197

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 09824197

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

REEP Request for entry into the european phase

Ref document number: 2009824197

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2009824197

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2779261

Country of ref document: CA

Ref document number: 2009308702

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 3884/DELNP/2012

Country of ref document: IN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2009308702

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20091030

Kind code of ref document: A